JP6708244B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Specifically, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the state where the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a combination lottery execution means for executing combination lottery processing,
A winning-correspondence granting unit that grants a winning-correspondence privilege corresponding to a winning combination in the winning combination lottery process,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than the predetermined game state, with at least one condition that the predetermined role is won in the combination lottery process in the state before transition,
In the pre-transition state, at least one condition that a different winning combination has been won in the combination lottery process, means for increasing the expectation level regarding the advantageous game state in the pre-transition state,
Equipped with
The different combination does not serve as a grant trigger in the advantageous game state in the pre-transition state, but becomes a grant trigger in the other game states,
At least in the pre-transition state, the probability of being the predetermined winning combination is higher than the probability of being the different winning combination ,
The predetermined combination is a grant trigger in the advantageous game state in the pre-transition state, but is not a grant trigger in the other game states .

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement|sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop symbol when each (a)-(g) winning occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop symbol when each (a)-(g) winning occurs. (A) It is a front view of an acquisition number display part and an internal state alerting|reporting part, (b) It is a front view of a privilege point alerting part and a stock alerting part, (c) It is a front view of a winning number alerting part. FIG. 9 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by the master MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for non-internal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for internal back states. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode that is established. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data performed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing a winning determination process executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CB state process performed in the main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the transition of the game state which occurs under control of the main side MPU. 7 is a timing chart for explaining a light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st wait setup processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd wait setup processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows bonus AT management processing performed in the master MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a situation when a 1st special replay win or a miss result is obtained in the state after CB internal. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing a state in which a second special replay win or a third special replay win is achieved in the post-CB internal state. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the CB in-progress state and the bonus AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic process performed by the sub MPU. It is a flowchart showing a standby effect setting process executed by the sub MPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a CB setting process executed by the sub MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transition aspect from a non-AT state to an AT state. It is a flow chart which shows processing during non-AT performed in sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer opportunity management process performed by the sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the transfer opportunity performed by the sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows ceiling game management processing performed by a sub MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining each game state included in the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process in AT performed by a sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state before a branch performed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st addition process performed by the sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition state performed by the sub MPU. (A) It is a flow chart which shows information control processing performed by a sub side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a stock information table. (A) is a timing chart for explaining how bonus points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the AT state before branch, and (B1) to (B4) light emission modes of the bonus point notification unit and the stock notification unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the branch AT state performed by the sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for branch AT states performed by sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd addition processing performed by the sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the termination process of the branch AT state performed by the sub MPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a pre-branching AT state setting process executed by a sub MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the progress mode of a branch AT state, and is a figure which shows the content of the battle production|operation in the (B1)-(B6) image display device simply. It is an explanatory view for explaining how the AT continuation probability in the AT continuous lottery process is promoted. 7 is a timing chart showing transition timings to an addition state in a pre-branching AT state and a branch AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition states performed by the sub MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition mode of an addition state, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a privilege point counter. It is a flow chart which shows processing for the last chance performed in sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing for bonus AT performed in sub MPU. (A) It is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electric configuration of a game hall in which a large number of slot machines are installed, and (b) is a front view of an external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the end performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart showing a bell winning determination process executed by the main MPU. 6 is a timing chart showing how the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell role. It is a flowchart which shows the normal replay press order determination process performed by the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of a start performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for normal replays performed by the sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for avoiding a push order performed by the sub MPU. It is a timing chart showing how the output mode of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay combination. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process before the start performed by the main MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state. 9 is a timing chart showing an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when the bonus AT state is entered in the middle of the normal AT state. 9 is a flowchart showing an AT1 signal and AT2 signal setting process executed by the main MPU in the second embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a final chance state setting process executed by the sub MPU in the third embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a termination process of a normal AT state executed by a sub MPU in the fourth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms the outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with its left side portion as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface so that it cannot be opened, and the locked state is released by an unlocking operation on the key cylinder 14 by a predetermined key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12 to notify the player of the game state. On the game panel 20, three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R that are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one-to-one correspondence with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is in a visible state through the corresponding display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R as if moving from top to bottom.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be individually and rotationally driven by driving the stepping motor. Is becoming

As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while a medal is inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are brought into a state in which they can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 32L starts rotating.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and the medal award is given. And, the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is equivalent to one game.

On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 when the medals can be inserted, and when the medals cannot be inserted by the selector 52. It is guided to the medal receiving tray 59 from the medal discharging port 58 provided in the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12. Note that the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when the winning corresponding to the awarding of medals is established on the activated line. There is.

Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided that is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals are inserted at one time. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as an actual medal.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53, as shown in FIG. The power supply device 54 includes a power button 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 that resets various states of the slot machine 10, and the setting states of the slot machine 10 from “setting 1” to “setting 1”. And a setting key insertion hole 57 that is operated in order to change within the range of “setting 6”.

<Design attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R will be described.

In FIG. 3, the symbol array of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is shown. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively, but these numbers are visible to the main controller 70 through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the corresponding numbers will be used for description.

As the symbols, a "bell" symbol (for example, 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay 1" symbol (for example, 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on the left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (for example, 11th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" There are 9 types of symbols (for example, 9th on the left reel 32L), "Replay 3" symbols (for example, 6th on the left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbols (for example, 5th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that the total of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized. Therefore, in a state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in a state where a specified number of medals have been bet, and a winning corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, a privilege of paying out medals, replay And a transition of the gaming state.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line in which winning can be achieved. Then, the main line ML is set not as a line extending straight but as a folding line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M and the lower design of the right reel 32R, the upper design of the left reel 32L, the upper design of the middle reel 32M and the upper design of the right reel 32R. Sub-line SL2 tied together, middle reel design of left reel 32L, middle reel design of middle reel 32M, and middle reel design of right reel 32R, and lower reel design of left reel 32L, lower reel design of middle reel 32M and right reel 32R On the line extending in a straight line, such as the subline SL4 connecting the lower symbols, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the subline SL5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. Even if the combination is established, the winning is not established. The main line is not limited to one line, and may be two lines, three lines, four lines, or five lines or more. The number of main lines to be activated may be different. Further, the main line is not limited to the bent line, and may be a straight line.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols that become a prize and a privilege that is awarded when the prize is won. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols that are won and a privilege that is awarded when the winning is won, and FIGS. 6A to 6G and FIG. (A)-FIG.7(g) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the stop design at the time of each winning.

The small role prizes for which medals are paid out include the first to twelfth supplementary prizes, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize.

Specifically, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is Either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol. If it is, it is any of the first to ninth supplementary prize. In addition, if the "red 7" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol stop from the left on the main line ML, the tenth supplementary prize is awarded, and the "BAR" symbol, the "bell" symbol from the left on the main line ML. And, if the "bell" symbol is stopped, the eleventh supplementary prize is awarded, and if the "watermelon" symbol, the "bell" symbol, and the "bell" symbol are stopped from the left on the main line ML, the twelfth supplementary prize is awarded. In the case of any of the first to twelfth supplementary prizes, one medal is paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals are paid out when two bets are placed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the first bell is won. In the case of the first bell winning, four medals are paid out when a three bet is made, and two medals are paid out when a two bet is made.

When the first bell winning is achieved, as shown in FIG. 6A, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "bell" symbols in the lower subline SL4. The player can easily recognize that the winning is achieved when the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a straight line. In this case, by stopping and displaying the same combination of "bell" symbols at the time of winning the first bell, it is easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of the winning in the configuration in which the winning establishment mode in the main line ML is diversified. It becomes possible.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. If it is either, the second bell wins. When the second bell is won, 9 medals are paid out when a 3 bet is placed, and 2 medals are paid out when a 2 bet is placed.

When the second bell winning is achieved, as shown in FIG. 6B, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "bell" symbols in the upwardly rising sub line SL5. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell prize has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed during the second bell winning is the subline SL5, which is different from the subline SL4 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed during the first bell winning. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first bell winning and the second bell winning from the player who determines the presence or absence of the winning depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "Watermelon" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon winning is won. When the first watermelon prize is achieved, four medals are paid out when a three bet is placed, and two medals are paid out when a two bet is placed.

In the case of winning the first watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6C, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the descending right subline SL1 can be "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol passes through the upper, middle, or lower stages, the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 when the first watermelon is won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "BAR" symbol or a "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is " If it is a "watermelon" design, it will be the second watermelon prize. If the second watermelon is won, four medals will be paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals will be paid out when two bets are placed.

In the case of the second watermelon winning combination, as shown in FIG. 6D, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 are all "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon prize has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of the “watermelon” symbols is stopped and displayed in the second watermelon winning is the subline SL4, which is different from the subline SL1 in which the combination of the “watermelon” symbols is stopped and displayed in the first watermelon winning. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize for the player who determines the presence or absence of the prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

As a prize to which a replay privilege that allows the player to play the next game without betting a medal (or virtual medal) is given, a normal replay prize, a first bell replay prize, a second bell replay prize, a first There are a cherry replay prize, a second cherry replay prize, a first special replay prize, a second special replay prize, a first special replay prize, a second special replay prize and a third special replay prize.

Specifically, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is If any of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any of the "White 7" symbol and the "Watermelon" symbol, a normal replay prize Becomes

When the normal replay is won, as shown in FIG. 6(e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle subline SL3 are "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and "Replay 3" It will be one of the designs. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the normal replay prize has been won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is "cherry" symbol. And, when the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the first bell replay prize is won.

In the case of the first bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6(f), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first bell replay prize has been won. Also, the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed during the first bell replay winning is the subline SL2, and the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed during the first bell winning is in the second bell winning This is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first bell replay prize from the first bell prize and the second bell prize for the player who judges the presence or absence of the prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It will be possible.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, the second bell replay prize is awarded.

When the second bell replay is won, as shown in FIG. 6(g), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle subline SL3 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell replay prize has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed in the second bell replay winning is the subline SL3, and the line in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first bell winning is SL4 and the second bell winning. The subline SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed is different from the subline SL2 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first bell replay winning. Due to such a difference, the second bell replay prize is set to the first bell prize, the second bell prize and the first bell replay prize for the player who judges the presence or absence of the prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It is possible to distinguish them from each other.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol. And, if it is any of the "watermelon" symbols, it will be the first cherry replay prize.

In the case of the first cherry replay prize, as shown in FIG. 7A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the descending right subline SL1 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of the "cherry" symbols is not stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay prize is won, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R as an opportunity notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivational presentation is performed. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "cherry" symbol by confirming the effect, the two "cherry" symbols or the three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL1. Can be displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the right symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the second cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7B, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 can all be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "cherry" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second cherry replay prize is won, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivational presentation is performed. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop and display the "cherry" symbol after confirming the effect, the two "cherry" symbols or the three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL2. Can be displayed. Further, the line in which the combination of "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed in the second cherry replay winning is the subline SL2, and is different from the subline SL1 in which the combination of "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed in the first cherry replay winning. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first cherry replay prize and the second cherry replay prize from the player who determines the presence or absence of the prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay" In the case of either the "2" symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, the first special replay prize is won. Note that the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary as to whether or not the first special replay prize is won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay 1" symbol, "replay 2". If it is either the symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, the second special replay prize is won.

On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the first special replay prize is awarded. Note that the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary as to whether or not the first special replay prize is won.

In the case of the first special replay prize, as shown in FIG. 7C, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "white 7" symbols in each of the descending right subline SL1 and the ascending subline SL5. Can be. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "white 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is won, the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as an opportunity notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivational presentation is executed. By confirming the effect and stopping each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop and display the "white 7" symbol, the three "white 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed in the subline SL1. In addition, the said production|presentation can be performed also when the winning combination corresponding to a 1st special replay winning is not won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either a "white 7" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is If the symbol is "white 7", the second special replay prize will be awarded.

In the case of the second special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7D, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 can all be "white 7" symbols. In addition to this, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the lower subline SL4 can all be "white 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "white 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second special replay prize is won, the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as an opportunity notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivational presentation is executed. By confirming the effect and stopping each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop and display the "white 7" symbol, the three "chi white 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed in the subline SL2. Further, the line in which the combination of the "white 7" symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the second special replay winning is the subline SL2 or the subline SL4, and the subline SL1 at which the combination of the "white 7" symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the first special replay winning is displayed. And different from the sub line SL5. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first special replay winning from the second special replay winning for the player who judges the presence or absence of the winning depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the said production|presentation can be performed also when the winning combination corresponding to a 2nd special replay winning is not won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol and the right reel. When the stop symbol of 32R is the "red 7" symbol, the third special replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the third special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7(e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 can be "red 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the third special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "red 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the third special replay prize is won, the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as an opportunity notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivational presentation is executed. By confirming the effect and stopping each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop and display the "red 7" symbol, the three "red 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed in the subline SL4. In addition, the said production|presentation can be performed also when the winning combination corresponding to the 3rd special replay winning is not won.

When any one of the above replay prizes is awarded, it is possible to play the next game while betting is unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, it is possible to start a game of the next game in a three-bet state while betting is unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible. Further, when one of the replay prizes is won in the game in which two medals are bet, it is possible to start the game of the next game in a two-bet state while betting is not required for both medals and virtual medals. ..

There is a CB (challenge bonus) prize as a status change prize in which only the game status is changed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. If there is, it will be a CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

The CB state is a gaming state in which when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination is stopped on the main line ML, a medal is paid out as a winning combination regardless of whether or not there is a winning combination. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning is not set to "1", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML, the first bell winning The number of medals corresponding to is given to the player. On the other hand, the replay prize is established on condition that the corresponding winning combination has been won by the lottery.

In the CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state which is not the CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that the reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed before the stipulated time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the CB state, the reel control is performed on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game is performed, but the reel control is not performed on the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control is performed in which the left stop button 42 is operated and only one symbol can be slid at maximum. In other words, in the CB game state, it can be said that the reel control for stopping the left reel 32L is performed until the specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time has elapsed after the left stop button 42 was operated.

In the CB state, when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is prioritized, and when the replay winning is not possible, one of the small winning awards occurs at 100%. If no winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, one of the small winnings will occur at 100%. In this case, the number of bets in each game is set to 2 in the CB state. As described above, when the number of bets is two, the number of medals to be paid out is two, whichever winning a small win is achieved. Therefore, in the CB state, only two coins are paid out when the small winning combination is established. When the replay prize is established in the CB state, the bet number in the next game is 2. Therefore, in the CB state, either a payout of two medals or a replay in the two bet state will occur in each game in which two bets have been placed, and in the CB state, the number of medals owned by the player will increase or decrease. do not do. The CB state ends when the small winning combination is won 19 times.

In the CB game, the reel control for sliding only up to 1 symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the stop button operated first does not slide up to 1 symbol. May be performed, and reel control may be performed in which only a maximum of one symbol slides for a predetermined reel. Furthermore, the reel control corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is performed such that reel control in which the reel slides only up to a maximum of one symbol is performed, and the stop button operated in a certain order. For the reel corresponding to, reel control may be performed in which only a maximum of one symbol slides.

As described above, there are small winning a prize, replay winning and CB winning as modes of winning, but in the lottery result of the internal lottery, there are deviation results in which none of these winnings can occur. Then, in the case of the disengagement result, as shown in FIG. 7(f), the combination of the “white 7” symbols can be stopped on the sub-line SL3 in the middle stage, and as shown in FIG. 7(g), The combination of the "red 7" symbols may be stopped on the sub-line SL3 in the middle row. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the result of disconnection has occurred. However, in the case of the deviation result, the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the above winnings is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Further, in the case of the disengagement result, the line in which the combination of the “white 7” symbol or the combination of the “red 7” symbols is stopped and displayed is the subline SL3, so the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize In the case of replay winning, the combination of the "white 7" symbol or the combination of the "red 7" symbol is different from the sub-line that is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, for the player who determines whether or not there is a prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed, the deviation result is compared with the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize. It is possible to distinguish them.

<Apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, at a position below the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a credit display portion 61 for displaying the stored and stored number of virtual medals and a number of medals won at the time of winning. An acquired number display section 62 is provided respectively. These display portions 61 and 62 are each formed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired number display section 62 is provided with an internal state notification section 63 in addition to the segment light emitting section 62a for displaying the acquired number. The internal state notifying unit 63 uses a single-color emission type LED of a display color different from that of the segment light emitting unit 62a. Further, while the segment light emitting section 62a is arranged on the center side on the display surface of the acquired number display section 62, the internal state notification section 63 is arranged on the corner side of the display surface of the acquired number display section 62. There is.

The internal state notifying unit 63 is a display unit for notifying that the player is in a winning CB combination. When winning a CB role, unlike other winning roles, the winning state of the CB role is carried over and the winning state of the CB role is canceled until the CB winning is achieved on the main line ML. .. In this case, the internal state notification unit 63 is in the off state as the non-internal notification mode when the CB combination is not won and in the CB state, and as the internal notification mode when the CB combination is won. It is turned on. In this lighting state, lighting is maintained, but instead of this, it may be configured to blink in a predetermined cycle.

By providing the internal state notification unit 63, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the situation is such that the winning combination for the CB is won. Further, the segment light emitting unit 62a of the acquired number display unit 62 is turned on when a medal or a virtual medal is given at the end of one game, and is turned off at the start of the next game, and is turned off. Will be maintained until a new small prize is won. Therefore, in the configuration in which the internal state notifying unit 63 is arranged in the acquired number display unit 62 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, the acquired number display unit 62 is selected in the situation in which the CB role is won. In, it becomes possible to positively cause a situation in which only the internal state informing unit 63 is in a lighting state, and the manager of the game hall can easily confirm the internal state informing unit 63. The effect of facilitating such confirmation can also be achieved by the internal state notifying section 63 having a different emission color from that of the segment light emitting section 62a.

Other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the segment light emitting parts of the credit display part 61 and the acquired number display part 62, and the internal state notifying part 63. Even in this case, by setting the internal state notifying unit 63 on the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, the confirmation of the internal state notifying unit 63 can be facilitated.

At the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 64 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right that emits various sound effects as the game progresses and informs the player of the game state. A speaker 65 and an image display device 66 such as a liquid crystal display device for giving various information to the player.

Below the image display device 66, a privilege point notification section 67 and a stock notification section 68 are provided, and on the game panel 20, a victory number notification section 69 is provided to the right of the display window sections 21L, 21M, 21R. Has been.

FIG. 8B is a front view of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. As will be described later in detail, when a predetermined hand is won in the normal AT (assist time) state and the prize is won in the bonus point lottery process, bonus points are added, and the number of points accumulated by the addition is set as a reference point. In the case of the 7 points, the number of times of setting in the normal AT state is added once and the state is shifted to the additional state.

The privilege point notification unit 67 is for notifying the number of surplus when the number of surplus when the number of privilege points is divided by 7 is 1 or more. The privilege point notification section 67 is provided with 7×2 unit point display sections 67a using LEDs of a single color emission type, and these unit point display sections 67a are arranged on the left and right with the stock notification section 68 interposed therebetween. They are evenly arranged. Each of the pair of left and right display areas is provided with seven unit point display portions 67a. For example, when the number of privilege points is "1", each of the outermost one of the pair of display areas is one. The unit point display portion 67a is turned on, and for example, when the number of privilege points is "5", the unit point display portions 67a for five pieces from the outside in the pair of left and right display areas are turned on.

The stock notification unit 68 is for notifying the number of quotients when the quotient when the number of privilege points is divided by 7 is 1 or more. The stock notification unit 68 uses a multicolor light emitting type LED, and notifies the number of stocks in the normal AT state by the color of the light emitted.

FIG. 8C is a front view of the winning number notification unit 69. As will be described later in detail, there are a pre-branch AT state and a branch AT state in the normal AT state, and in the branch AT state after the pre-branch AT state, the battle effect is performed on the image display device 66. Then, when the normal AT state continues, as the battle effect, the victory effect of the teammate character or the draw effect between the teammate character and the enemy character is performed, and when the normal AT state does not continue, As the battle effect, the defeat effect of the teammate character is performed. When a predetermined number of times of winning effects are executed in a series of normal AT states, the winning probability in the continuous lottery in the normal AT state is set to the highest probability.

The winning number display section 69 is for notifying the number of times the winning effect has been executed in a series of normal AT states. The winning number display unit 69 is provided with twelve unit winning number display units 69a using LEDs of a single color light emission, which is the number corresponding to the predetermined number of times of execution, and these unit winning number display units 69a have outer edges. They are arranged in a circular shape. For example, if the number of win effects in the series of normal AT states is one, one unit victory number display portion 69a is turned on, and if it is five times, for example, five consecutive unit victory numbers are displayed. The part 69a is turned on.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main controller 70 includes a main board, and the main board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like as an enclosing means. The substrate box includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are fastened by a fastening unit so as not to be opened. When the board box is opened, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and when the fastening state is released, a breakage point occurs. By confirming the presence or absence of the breakage portion, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the substrate box is opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub controller 80 in addition to the main controller 70. The sub-control device 80 is arranged behind the image display device 66 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The sub control device 80 executes control of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, the image display device 66, the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the winning number notification unit 69 based on the command received from the main control device 70. . The sub controller 80 has a control board housed in a board box, like the main controller 70.

<Electrical configuration of the slot machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main game. An MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R makes one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49. Credit detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of the above, a settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting the operation of the settlement button 51, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, and a reset detection sensor 56a for detecting the operation of the reset button 56. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 57a for detecting the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

On the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a payout motor of a hopper device 53, a credit display unit 61, an acquired number display unit 62, an internal state. The notification unit 63, the sub control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72, and the drive control of the hopper device 53 is performed by the MPU 72 when a small winning combination is established and medals are paid out. Done by. Further, the display control of the credit display unit 61, the acquired number display unit 62, and the internal state notification unit 63 is directly executed by the MPU 72 without going through another control device. A command is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub control device 80 at each timing of each game.

An external terminal board 90 is provided on the output side of the MPU 72. Although not shown, the external terminal board 90 is provided adjacent to the main controller 70 on the back plate of the housing 11. As will be described later in detail, the MPU 72 outputs various signals corresponding to the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall through the external terminal board 90.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit for supplying drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied from an external power source to the power supply unit. The monitored voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. Upon receiving the power failure signal, the MPU 72 executes the processing at the time of power failure, and after power recovery, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with an on-power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power cut in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power supply is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during power cut (for example, one or two days). To be done. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized.

The sub-control device 80 includes a sub-control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various effects. An MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are built in.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 82, and each may be configured into an individual chip. In addition, the RAM 84 is supplied with backup power from the power supply unit during power cut of the power supply device 54 in a situation where supply of operating power from an external power supply is cut off, and the backup power is supplied (for example, one day). (2 days), the data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, the data stored and held in the RAM 84 is initialized.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 and receives various commands from the MPU 72.

An upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, an image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67, a stock notification unit 68, and a winning number notification unit 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. In the MPU 82, based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the light emission control of the upper lamp 64, the sound output control of the speaker 65, the display control of the image display device 66, the light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit. By executing the light emission control of 68 and the light emission control of the winning number notification unit 69, various notifications and various effects are performed.

In the following description, for convenience of description, the MPU 72, the ROM 73, and the RAM 74 of the main controller 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, the ROM 83, and the RAM 84 of the sub controller 80 are the sub sides, respectively. They are called MPU 82, sub-side ROM 83, and sub-side RAM 84.

<Process Performed by Main MPU 72 and Sub MPU 82>
Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

The processing of the main MPU 72 is roughly classified into a normal processing that is repeatedly executed after execution of the main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt processing that is started by periodically interrupting the normal processing. Therefore, for convenience of description, the timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then the normal processing will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1". When the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission is not completed, this process is terminated and the timer interrupt process is resumed to terminate the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data of the main RAM 74 is normal when the power failure is resolved and stored in the main RAM 74 is prohibited, so that subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

When the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer is cleared to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed that enables the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S106, stepping motor control processing for driving the stepping motors is performed in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and sensor monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the reading result is normal is performed. In step S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the result of counting the bet number of medals and the number of payouts to the outside.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the sub control device 80 is performed. In step S111, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port is performed. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start processing, the sub control device 80 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the sub control device 80 and the like is completed, the process proceeds to steps S203 to S219.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the pre-start wait time set in the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time before the start has not elapsed, the processing in step S203 is executed again, and if the wait time before the start has elapsed, the start waiting processing is executed in step S204. When the wait time before the start is set or when the negative determination is made once in step S203, the measurement of the wait time is started. If the wait time is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S204.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay prize has occurred in the previous game. If any replay prize has been generated, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. If no replay prize has occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether or not a medal has been inserted or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process. It is determined whether or not, and if either is done, the medal insertion process for changing the bet number and the like is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither a medal has been inserted nor the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the prescribed number (“3” or “2” in the present embodiment), and the bet number has not reached the prescribed number. In this case, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204. If the bet number has reached the specified number, the pre-start external output setting process is executed in step S206. In the external output setting process, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Then, in step S207, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated.

If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204. On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are bet. Therefore, it is started to start the game. Means that a command has occurred. In such a case, after the main line ML is activated, the bet acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 in step S208. After that, in step S209, a lottery process for lottery of the winning combination in the current game is executed, and in step S210, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Execute the external output setting process at the start of. Then, in step S211, it is determined whether or not the freeze time set in the lottery process in step S209 has elapsed. When the freeze time has not elapsed, the process of step S211 is executed again, and when the freeze time has elapsed, the processes of step S212 and subsequent steps are executed. When the freeze time is set, when the negative determination is made once in step S211, the measurement of the freeze time is started. If the freeze time is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S212 and thereafter.

In step S212, a reel control process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Then, in step S213, medal payout processing is executed. In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for giving the player the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to the small winning a prize of this time is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If so, the hopper device 53 is drive-controlled so that several medals exceeding the maximum value are paid out to the medal tray 59.

Thereafter, in step S214, CB state processing for controlling the CB state is executed, in step S215, bonus AT management processing for controlling the bonus AT (assist time) state is executed, and further to step S216. Then, the external output setting process at the end for performing various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 is executed.

After that, in step S217, it is determined whether or not the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S217, the process directly returns to step S201. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S217, it is determined in step S218 whether or not the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has not elapsed, the process of step S218 is executed again. If the wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219, and then the process returns to step S201. When the wait time is set, when the negative determination is made once in step S218, the measurement of the wait time is started. If the wait time is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S219.

Hereinafter, the lottery process of step S209, the reel control process of step S212, the CB state process of step S214, and the bonus AT management process of step S215 will be described in detail. The external output setting processing of steps S206, S210, and S216 will be described in detail after the description of the game flow.

<Lottery processing>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the lottery process of step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether the winning combination is true or false is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is won is read from the main ROM 73. In this slot machine 10, there are three types of gaming states in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72: a CB non-internal state, a CB internal rear state, and a CB in-progress state. In step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the content of the flag corresponding to the gaming state provided in the main RAM 74, and the lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is selected. Specifically, when the current gaming state is the CB non-internal state, the non-internal state lottery table is selected, and when the current gaming state is the CB internal post state, the internal post state lottery table is selected. If the current gaming state is the CB state, the CB state lottery table is selected.

Further, in the slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared in advance, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation is performed. Thus, it is possible to set which of the winning probabilities the internal process is to be executed on. The internal rear state lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of six stages, and in step S302, the internal rear state in which the expected value of medal payout is the lowest when the setting state is "setting 1" The lottery table for internal use is selected, and the lottery table for the internal rear state having the highest expected value of medal payout is selected in the case of "setting 6". On the other hand, only one type of non-internal state lottery table and CB lottery table are prepared so as to be common to all setting states.

Each lottery table will be described. First, the non-internal state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, an index value IV is set in the non-internal state lottery table, and a winning combination is associated with each index value IV and a point value PV is set. .. The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free-run counter.

Specifically, the second bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the fifth compensation winning data, and the ninth compensation winning data are set in IV=1. When the winning is achieved with IV=1, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the first supplemental prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

As shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, and the ninth compensation winning data are set in IV=2. When the winning is achieved with IV=2, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the second supplemental prize, the fourth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur.

As shown in FIG. 13, IV=3 is set with second bell winning data, second supplement winning data, sixth supplement winning data, and seventh supplement winning data. In the case of winning with IV=3, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize may occur.

As shown in FIG. 13, IV=4 is set with second bell winning data, third supplement winning data, fifth supplement winning data, and seventh supplement winning data. When the winning is achieved with IV=4, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell prize is surely generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the third supplemental prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize may occur.

For IV=5, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the third compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, the fifth compensation winning data, and the eighth compensation winning data. The compensation winning data and the ninth compensation winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with IV=5, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any of the first supplemental prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this omission is lower than in the case of IV=1 to 4.

For IV=6, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the second compensation winning data, the fourth compensation winning data, the sixth compensation winning data, and the eighth compensation winning data. The compensation winning data and the ninth compensation winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with IV=6, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize is generated. there is a possibility. The probability of this omission is lower than in the case of IV=1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 13, IV=7 is set with first watermelon winning data, second watermelon winning data, tenth compensation winning data, eleventh compensation winning data, and twelfth compensation winning data. ing. In the case of winning with IV=7, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize can be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon prize nor the second watermelon prize will be won. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize and the twelfth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the tenth supplementary prize, the eleventh supplementary prize, and the twelfth supplementary prize will occur.

In IV=8, as shown in FIG. 13, normal replay winning data is set. When the winning is achieved with IV=8, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 13, CB winning data is set in IV=9. In the case of winning with IV=9, a CB winning may occur regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the CB winning may not occur.

When the non-internal state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV=1, the probability of winning when IV=2, the probability of winning when IV=3, and the case of IV=4 The probability of winning is about 1/9.3, and the probability of winning when IV=5 and the probability of winning when IV=6 are about 1/11.6, respectively. , The probability of winning when IV=7 is about 1/66.7, the probability of winning when IV=8 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when IV=9 is It is about 1/4.3.

Next, the internal rear state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 14, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the internal post-state, as in the lottery table for the non-internal state, and a winning combination is associated with each index value IV. At the same time, the point value PV is set.

The winning data set to IV=1 to 8 is the same as in the case of the lottery table for non-internal state.

In IV=9, the first bell replay winning data and the first cherry replay winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV=9, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the first cherry replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set in IV=10. In the case of winning with IV=10, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay prize or the first special replay prize occurs. In this case, the second bell replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. When the winning is achieved with IV=10, and the left reel 32L is first stopped and operated, when the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second bell replay prize can be generated, the second bell replay prize is won. Is given priority, and when it is the timing at which the second bell replay prize is not allowed to be generated, the first special replay prize is generated. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 14, the first bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the second special replay winning data, and the third special replay winning data are set in IV=11. When the winning is achieved with IV=11, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .. In other cases, the first cherry replay prize, the second special replay prize, or the third special replay prize occurs. In this case, the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, while the first cherry replay prize may be generated from each stop button 42 to 44. It occurs regardless of the operation timing. When IV=11 is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped and operated, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize can be generated. If it is, the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize is prioritized, and if the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize are not generated, the first cherry replay prize is generated. Occurs.

As shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the second special replay winning data are set in IV=12. In the case of winning with IV=12, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay prize or the first special replay prize occurs. In this case, the second bell replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. When the winning is achieved at IV=12 and the left reel 32L is first stopped and operated, when the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second bell replay winning can be generated, the second bell replay winning is won. Is given priority, and when it is the timing at which the second bell replay prize is not allowed to be generated, the first special replay prize is generated. When the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay prize or the second special replay prize occurs. In this case, the second special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped when IV=12, and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second special replay winning is possible, When the second special replay winning is prioritized and the second special replay winning is not possible, the first cherry replay winning is generated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set in IV=13. In the case of winning with IV=13, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay prize or the first special replay prize occurs. In this case, the second bell replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. When the winning is achieved at IV=13, and the left reel 32L is first stopped and operated, when the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second bell replay winning can be generated, the second bell replay winning is won. Is given priority, and when it is the timing at which the second bell replay prize is not allowed to be generated, the first special replay prize is generated. When the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay prize or the first special replay prize occurs. In this case, the first special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. To do. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped at IV=13 and the stop operation is performed first, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the first special replay winning is possible, When it is time to generate the first special replay prize and the generation of the first special replay prize is disabled, the first cherry replay prize is generated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the first cherry replay winning data is set in IV=14. When the winning is achieved with IV=14, as shown in FIG. 15, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first cherry replay prize is surely generated. ..

As shown in FIG. 14, the second cherry replay winning data is set in IV=15. When the winning is achieved with IV=15, as shown in FIG. 15, the second cherry replay prize is surely generated irrespective of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. ..

As shown in FIG. 14, the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set in IV=16. When the winning is achieved with IV=16, as shown in FIG. 15, the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is generated irrespective of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the second special replay prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay prize occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. To do. In the case of winning with IV=16, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the generation of the second special replay prize, the occurrence of the second special replay prize is given priority, and the second special replay prize is generated. When it is time to generate the special replay prize, the first special replay prize is generated.

When the internal post-state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV=1, the probability of winning when IV=2, the probability of winning when IV=3, and the case of IV=4 The probability of winning is about 1/9.3, and the probability of winning when IV=5 and the probability of winning when IV=6 are about 1/11.6, respectively. , The probability of winning when IV=7 is about 1/66.7, the probability of winning when IV=8 is about 1.2.9, and winning when IV=9 The probability is about 1/65, the probability of winning when IV=10 is about 1/135, and the probability of winning when IV=11 is about 1/3277, and when IV=12. The probability of winning is about 1/1456, the probability of winning when IV=13 is about 1/1456, and the probability of winning when IV=14 is about 1/212. =15, the probability of winning is about 1/185, and when IV=16, the probability of winning is about 1/328. The probability of becoming is 1/65536.

Next, the CB state lottery table will be described.

The index value IV is set in the CB state lottery table, similarly to the non-internal state lottery table and the internal post-state lottery table, and each winning combination is associated with each index value IV. Along with this, the point value PV is set. In the CB state lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set as IV=1, and other winning data is not set. The winning probability is the same as in the case of the internal post-state lottery table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the normal replay combination may be higher or lower than in the case of the internal post-state lottery table.

Only the normal replay combination is set in the CB state lottery table as described above, but as already explained, in the situation where the normal replay combination is not won in the CB state, the small winning combination is won regardless of the result of the lottery process. The reel control is executed so that one of the small winning combinations is surely generated in a situation where the normal replay combination is not won. Therefore, in the CB state, the normal replay winning is surely generated when the normal replay winning combination is won, and one of the small win winnings is surely generated when the normal replay winning is not won.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 12 ), after selecting the lottery table in step S302, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is set in step S304. To do. In the determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1 which is the current index value IV is added to this random number value to obtain a new determination value DV. The determination value DV is used.

Then, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. In the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning combination, it is judged whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If the number exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed.

In the winning data acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, a corresponding winning flag setting process is executed. For example, when IV=1 is won in a situation where the CB is in the internal post-state, among the flags provided in the main RAM 74, a flag indicating that IV=1 has been won and a second bell win “1” is set to each of the flag, the first compensation winning flag, the fifth compensation winning flag, and the ninth compensation winning flag. Also, for example, when the player wins IV=8 in a situation where the CB is in the post-internal state, among the flags provided in the main RAM 74, a flag indicating that the player wins with IV=8 and a normal replay win Set "1" to each of the flags.

In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 in the immediately preceding step S401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the lighting process of the internal state notification unit 63 is executed in step S403, and then the acquisition process of the true selection data is ended. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on, and the manager of the game hall and the player are notified that the internal CB is in the rear state.

When a negative determination is made in step S402, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the normal replay winning flag is set to "1". When an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the push-order lottery processing is executed in step S405, and in the subsequent step S406, a push-order command including push-order data corresponding to the result of the push-order lottery processing is sub-commanded. After setting for transmission to the side MPU 82, the acquisition process of the true selection data ends.

As described above, when the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay prize occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In this case, in step S405, the push-order lottery process is executed in order to generate a trigger for setting the AT1 signal, which will be described later, to the OFF state. In the push-order lottery process, the first stop target reel and the second stop target reel are determined by lottery, and the lottery is performed so that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop target reel. The sub-side MPU 82 controls the display of the image display device 66 so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the pressing order data of the pressing order command is displayed when the normal AT state described later is connected. To execute. The operation and effect of performing such processing will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S404, it is determined in step S407 whether or not "1" is set in the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. When a negative determination is made in step S407, the true selection data acquisition processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S407, in step S408, the value corresponding to the first freeze time (specifically 39 sec) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74, and then the true selection data is set. The acquisition process of is ended.

If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and execution of the processing in step S212 and subsequent steps is awaited. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Further, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when "1" is set to the first special replay winning flag as a result of the lottery process, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 39 seconds. During the freeze period, as will be described later, the control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the first freeze-corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. This allows the player to clearly recognize that he or she has won the first special replay combination.

If the winning flag set with “1” is not the CB winning flag, “0” is cleared after the end of the game with the winning flag set. On the other hand, when the winning flag set with “1” is the CB winning flag, it is reset on condition that the CB winning is established. That is, the state in which the CB winning flag is set to "1" may be valid over a plurality of games.

Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), if the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has been lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined whether or not there is a hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not the winning or hitting is determined, the process returns to step S304 and the winning or hitting determination of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the winning combination has been won, to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is valid based on the determination value DV.

When it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined whether or not the hit/no hit is determined, it means that the result of the lottery process of this game is a miss result. In this case, in step S309, the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether or not the CB internal rear state is present. When an affirmative determination is made in step S309, a value corresponding to the second freeze time (specifically 35 sec) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 in step S310.

As described above, when the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and execution of the processing of step S212 and subsequent steps is awaited. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Further, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, in the case where the result of the lottery process is out in the post-CB internal state, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 35 seconds. During the freeze period, as will be described later, the control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the second freeze-corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery result is out of the results in the CB internal rear state.

When the process of step S306 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S309, or the process of step S310 is executed, it means that the winning/judgment of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the lottery result command is set in step S311. The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 in order to grasp the result of the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the result of the winning/winning judgment of the winning combination. Then, in step S312, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the main lottery processing is ended.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process of step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S501, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In the rotation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started to rotate in the previous game, and if not, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 is performed. By performing such processing, the stepping motor control processing of step S106 in the timer interrupt processing starts the stepping motor acceleration processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The player is informed of the fact.

Following the rotation start process, in step S502, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process waits until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. To do. If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S502 and waits until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is issued, the stop command command is set in step S504.

The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 80 in order to know which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S505, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the base point position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop button is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input confirms the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the base point position. In the following step S506, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

In the present slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching pattern reaching the base point position as it is, Stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, stop mode for stopping after sliding for 2 symbols, stop mode for stopping after sliding for 3 symbols, and stop after sliding for 4 symbols Five patterns of stop modes, which are the stop mode to be performed, are prepared. Therefore, in step S506, a value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, in step S507, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol which is actually stopped at the base point position. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, a reel stop process of stopping the rotation of the reel in step S509 is performed. To do. Then, in step S510, it is determined whether or not all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S511, and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12), and by using the stop information, When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to be stopped, it is possible to calculate the slip number (specifically, “0” to “4”) with respect to the reaching symbol reaching the base point position. As the stop information, the slip number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As processing for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting processing executed in step S312 of the lottery processing (FIG. 12) and the stop information executed in step S511 of the reel control processing (FIG. 17). There is a second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the lottery process result. If the stop information set in this case is IV=1 to 7 in the CB non-internal state, the stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. If IV=1 to 7 and 9 to 13 in the rear state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set.

The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning data that has been set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. To do. In the slot machine 10, when winning is achieved when IV=1 to 7 and 9 to 13 in the CB non-internal state and the CB internal post-state (see FIG. 15), the winning data set and the stop command are set. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that has generated the.

By the way, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the normal replay prize, the first bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, the second cherry replay prize or the first special replay prize, The corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged so that the maximum number of symbols separated in the winding direction is four symbols. In such a configuration, the combination of the result of the lottery process and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the normal replay prize, the first bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, When any one of the 2 cherry replay prize and the first special replay prize is generated, the stop information is set so that the prize is generated regardless of the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the post-CB internal state, if the CB winning flag is set to "1", one of the small wins or replay will be won, but in this case, the small win corresponding to that win Alternatively, the stop information is set so that the replay prize has priority over the CB prize. For example, in the case where IV=1 in the post-CB internal state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing at which the CB prize can be generated, the small win prize is awarded in relation to the stop information. By selecting the priority sliding number, a small winning combination is generated and a CB winning is not generated. Further, for example, when the replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing at which the CB prize can be generated, the replay prize is won in relation to the stop information. The replay prize is generated and the CB prize is not generated by selecting the priority sliding number. However, when the result of the lottery is a miss result, a winning combination may occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 because there is no winning combination that is prioritized over the winning combination.

Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S512, and the process proceeds to step S513. After setting a winning result command including data corresponding to the result of the winning determination process as an output target to the sub control device 80, the reel control process is ended.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process.

In the winning determination process, in step S601, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML in the left reel 32L is grasped, and in step S602, the symbols stopped on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M are recognized. The type is grasped, and in step S603, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the right reel 32R is grasped. When grasping the type of symbol, the 2-byte data set for each symbol type is read from the main ROM 73. Then, in step S604, as the logical operation processing of the symbol combination, each 2-byte data grasped in steps S601 to S603 is AND-processed with the bits in the same order, so that 2 bytes corresponding to the symbol combination are obtained. Derive the data.

In a succeeding step S605, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in the step S604 corresponds to any winning data. If an affirmative decision is made in step S605, a winning award process is executed in step S606. In the prize-winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning flag corresponding to the winning that has occurred this time is set to "1", and if "1" is not set, an abnormal command is output to the sub control device 80. Set as a target. Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sub-side MPU 82 causes the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 to perform abnormality notification corresponding to the illegal winning. When the winning flag is set to "1", if the prize is a small role prize, the number of medals to be paid out is set so that medals or virtual medals can be given in the medal payout process. The payout object counter of the RAM 74 is set. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 11), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets as the current bet number is set.

Then, in step S607, the bell winning determination process is executed, and in step S608, the normal replay pressing order determination process is executed. These processes are processes for switching the ON/OFF state of the AT1 signal output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90. Details of these processes will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S605 or if the process of step S608 is executed, the process proceeds to step S609, and in the current lottery process (FIG. 12), the second special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 or It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third special replay winning flag. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the first prize setting processing is executed in step S610, and then the main prize determination processing is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S609, the first prize setting processing is executed in step S611. After executing the 2 weight setting process, the main winning determination process is ended. The first weight setting process and the second weight setting process will be described later.

<CB status processing>
Next, the CB state process executed in step S214 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the in-CB state by determining whether or not "1" is set in the CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74. When a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not "1" is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74. When a negative determination is made in step S702, the CB state process is terminated as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. Further, in step S703, it is determined whether or not a CB winning is generated by determining whether or not “1” is set in the CB establishment flag provided in the main RAM 74. When a negative determination is made in step S703, the CB state process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the CB status flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag and the CB establishment flag are cleared to "0". In the following step S705, "19" is set in the CB counter provided in the main RAM 74. The CB counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of small winning combinations that have occurred in the CB state has reached the CB end condition number.

In a succeeding step S706, "2" is set to the bet specified number counter provided in the main RAM 74. As a result, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the bet number is "2". Therefore, if the number of bets does not reach "2", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated, and bets of three or more are impossible.

In the following step S707, the extinguishing process of the internal state informing unit 63 is executed. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off, and the game hall manager and the player are notified that the post-CB internal state has ended. Then, in step S708, a CB start command including data indicating that the in-CB state is started is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the present CB state process is ended. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like so that the effect corresponding to the CB middle state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is in the CB state and an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S709 whether or not a small winning combination has been established in the current game. When a negative determination is made in step S709, the CB state process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, the value of the CB counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1. Then, in step S711, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter during CB is "0". If it is not "0", the CB state process is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to steps S712 to S714.

In step S712, the CB status flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", thereby ending the CB status. In a succeeding step S713, “3” is set in the bet prescribed number counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the bet number is "3". Therefore, if the number of bets does not reach "3", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated, and bets of four or more are impossible.

Then, in step S714, a CB end command including data indicating that the in-CB state has ended is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the present CB state processing ends. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 ends the effect corresponding to the CB in-state in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like.

<Aspect of transition of game state that occurs under control of main MPU 72>
Next, a mode of transition of the game state that occurs under the control of the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

When the main RAM 74 is initialized, or when the setting is changed while the CB winning flag is "0", the CB non-internal state ST1 is set. For example, the CB non-internal state ST1 is set when the game hall is opened for business. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the normal replay probability is about 1/7. Note that in the CB non-internal state ST1, no other replay combination is set as the lottery combination. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the CB probability is about 1/4.3 and the payout occurrence probability is about 1/1.6. However, in the CB non-internal state, the control for the AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and further, in order to win the first bell, it is necessary to answer correctly in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 that are 1/4. Since it is necessary to answer correctly in the order in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are halved for the second bell prize, even if the payout probability is about 1/1.6, which is a relatively high probability, the number of coins to be paid out Is basically one. This number is smaller than the prescribed number of bets, which is three.

When the CB combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and the CB winning is not generated, the state shifts to the post-CB internal state ST2. Further, the post-CB internal state ST2 is also shifted to when the setting is changed under the condition that the CB winning flag is "1". In the post-CB internal state ST2, the normal replay probability is about 1/2.9, which is higher than that in the CB non-internal state ST1. In the post-CB internal state ST2, since there are replay combinations other than the normal replay combinations, the replay occurrence probability becomes higher. In the post-CB internal state ST2, since the CB winning flag is already set to "1", the CB combination is not set as the lottery combination.

In the post-CB internal state ST2, the payout occurrence probability is about 1/1.6. Here, in the post-CB internal state ST2, control for the AT state can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82, as will be described later in detail. In the situation where the control for the AT state is not executed, as in the case of the CB non-internal state ST1, even if the payout occurrence probability is about 1/1.6, which is a relatively high probability, the payout number is basically the same. Will be 1 sheet. This number is smaller than the prescribed number of bets, which is three. On the other hand, in a situation where the sub-side MPU 82 is executing the control for the AT state, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the first bell winning is notified and the stop for the second bell winning is notified. The pressing order of the buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the payout probability is about 1/1.6, which is a relatively high probability, and the number of payouts is basically 9 or 4. This number is a number larger than the prescribed number of bets, which is three.

When a CB prize is generated in the post-CB internal state ST2, or when a CB combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and a CB prize is generated in the game, the CB winning state ST3 is entered. In the in-CB state ST3, as described above, a small win prize or a replay prize occurs in each game. However, in the in-CB state ST3, the prescribed number of bet numbers is limited to "2", and therefore the number of payouts is limited to two even if a small winning combination is generated. Therefore, in the CB state ST3, the number of medals owned by the player does not decrease, but does not increase. When the small winning combination has occurred 19 times in the CB state ST3, the process shifts to the CB non-internal state ST1.

<Emission Control Mode of Internal State Notification Unit 63>
Next, the light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

21A shows the execution period of the CB winning game, FIG. 21B shows the execution period of the CB internal post-state, FIG. 21C shows the execution period of the CB in-progress state, and FIG. ) Indicates a light emission period of the internal state notification unit 63.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game winning the CB combination is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21D, the internal state notifying unit 63 is turned on. In this way, the player starts the stop operation of at least the button corresponding to the final stop reel among the stop buttons 42 to 44 by starting the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 at the start of the game winning the CB combination. It is possible for the player to recognize that the CB role has been won.

Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game winning the CB combination ends. In this case, since no CB prize has been generated, the CB internal rear state is reached as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, at the timing of t3, a CB winning is generated, so that the post-CB internal state ends as shown in FIG. 21B, and the state shifts to the CB in-progress state as shown in FIG. 21C. Further, at the timing of t3 when the state is changed to the CB state, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as shown in FIG.

Then, at the timing of t4, the in-CB state ends as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the game winning the CB combination is started again, so that the internal state notifying unit 63 is turned on as shown in FIG. 21(d). At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the game winning the CB combination ends without the CB winning being established, so that the state shifts to the CB internal rear state as shown in FIG. 21(b). .

<First wait setting process>
Next, the first weight setting process executed in step S610 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the current lottery processing (FIG. 12). When an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the number-of-times lottery process for the first special time is executed in step S802. In the number-of-times lottery process at the first special time, the number-of-times lottery counter stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is set. The bonus AT number data corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read out from the first number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, the bonus AT number is set to 1, 2, and 3 times, the probability of selecting 1 time is 2/10, and the probability of selecting 2 times is 5/10. The probability of being selected three times is 3/10. Then, in step S803, a value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S802 is set in the bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

In the slot machine 10, as described above, even if "1" is set in the first bell winning flag, the correct answer is made in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which is ¼ to generate the first bell winning. Even if the second bell winning flag is set to "1", in order to generate the second bell winning, it is necessary to answer correctly in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which are 1/2. In this case, the display control is executed by the sub-side MPU 82 so that the image display device 66 is notified of the correct pressing order by being in the AT state. Therefore, in the AT state, payout of 9 or 4 sheets is likely to occur. This number is a number larger than the prescribed number of bets, which is three.

As for the AT state, the transition AT and the termination trigger are managed in the sub MPU 82 without being managed in the main MPU 72, and the transition timing and the termination trigger are managed in the main MPU 72 and performed in the sub MPU 82. There is a bonus AT state that cannot be ignored. The bonus AT state is entered by setting a value of 1 or more in the bonus AT number counter. The normal AT state will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S803 in the first weight setting processing, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. The bonus AT counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the bonus AT state is continued once.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S804, the first weight setting process is ended as it is, and if a negative decision is made in step S804, the operation proceeds to step S805. In step S805, the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in step S806 the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74. The wait counter is a counter for measuring the wait time forcibly set during the game in the main MPU 72, and the pre-start wait flag indicates the set wait time at the end of the set game and the next wait time. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify at which timing the game is started.

After that, in step S807, the start weight command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the first weight setting process is ended. Upon receiving the start weight command, the sub MPU 82 executes various controls so that the start weight corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S808 whether the value of the CB winning flag is “1” and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out. judge. By the way, as described above, the probability that the lottery result will be out of the result in the post-CB internal state is 1/65536.

When a negative determination is made in step S808, the first weight setting process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, the number-of-times lottery process at the time of the disengagement result is executed. In the number-of-times lottery process at the time of the deviation result, the second number-of-times lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is read. , Data of the number of bonus AT times corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read from the second number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, the number of bonus ATs is set to 1, 2, and 3 times, the probability of selecting 1 time is 1/10, and the probability of selecting 2 times is 3/10. The probability of being selected three times is 6/10. That is, when the second number lottery table is referred to, a larger bonus AT number is more likely to be selected than when the first number lottery table is referred to. Then, in step S810, a value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S809 is set in the bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

Then, in step S811, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. When the affirmative determination is made in step S811, the first weight setting process is ended as it is, and when the negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the wait generation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in the subsequent step S813, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. The wait generation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that a wait time will occur at the end of the current game. After that, in step S814, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the first wait setting process is ended. Upon receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first weight corresponding effect.

As described above, when the first special replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state, or when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out in the post-CB internal state, the bonus AT state is entered. In particular, when the first special replay combination is won, a prize different from the first special replay prize may occur depending on the stop order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The state changes regardless of the type of winning.

<Second weight setting process>
Next, the second weight setting process executed in step S611 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second weight setting process is activated when “1” is set in the second special replay winning flag or the third special replay winning flag, as described above.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the output state of the AT1 signal through the external terminal board 90 is the ON state. The AT1 signal is a signal output from the slot machine 10 to cause the hall computer HC to recognize whether or not it is in the normal AT state. In step S902, it is determined whether the first stop of the game this time is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. When a negative determination is made in step S901 or step S902, the second weight setting process is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in both step S901 and step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the number-of-times lottery process for the second special time is executed. In the number-of-times lottery process at the second special time, the third number-of-times lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 1.49 msec) updated in the main-side RAM 74 is set. The bonus AT number data corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read from the third number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, the bonus AT number is set to 1, 2, and 3 times, the probability of selecting 1 time is 7/10, and the probability of selecting 2 times is 2/10. The probability of selecting 3 times is 1/10. That is, when the third number lottery table is referred to, a smaller bonus AT number is more likely to be selected than when the first number lottery table and the second number lottery table are referred to. Then, in step S904, a value corresponding to the result of the number-of-times lottery process in step S903 is set in the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74.

Then, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. When the affirmative determination is made in step S905, the second weight setting process is ended as it is, and when the negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in the following step S907, the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. After that, in step S908, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the second wait setting process is ended. Upon receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first weight corresponding effect.

As described above, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. It shifts to the bonus AT state on condition that it is operated. However, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first special A prize different from the replay prize may be generated, but the type of the prize generated at the time of shifting to the bonus AT state is irrelevant.

<Bonus AT management processing>
Next, the bonus AT management processing executed in step S215 of the normal processing (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is set by determining whether or not "1" is set in the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74. By making a negative determination in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. When a negative determination is made in step S1002, the bonus AT management processing is ended as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1002, in step S1003, the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "30", which is the number of times the set is continued, and the bonus AT state of the main RAM 74 is set. Set "1" to the flag. The bonus AT counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the bonus AT state is continued once. After that, in step S1004, the bonus AT start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the bonus AT management processing is ended. Upon receiving the bonus AT start command, the sub-side MPU 82 recognizes that the bonus AT state has started, and sets the content of the effect on the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like to the content corresponding to the start of the bonus AT state. ..

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1001, the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S1005. Then, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter is "0". If it is not "0", the present bonus AT management processing is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter is "0". If it is "0", the bonus AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S1009, and the bonus AT end flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in step S1010. ”Is set. The bonus AT end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the bonus AT state has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008 or if the process of step S1010 is executed, the value of the end wait time (5 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 in step S1011. After that, in step S1012, the bonus AT end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80, and then the bonus AT management process is ended. The bonus AT end command is data corresponding to the value of the bonus AT number counter, that is, data indicating whether or not a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started after the execution time of the current bonus AT state is finished. Is included.

In the sub-side MPU 82, when the bonus AT end command including the data indicating that the new execution time of the bonus AT state is started is received, the speaker 65 is executed so that the effect indicating that the bonus AT state is continued is executed. It also controls the image display device 66 and the like. On the other hand, when the bonus AT end command that does not include the data indicating that the new execution time of the bonus AT state is started is received, the speaker 65 and the image are displayed so that the effect indicating that the bonus AT state is ended is executed. It controls the display device 66 and the like.

Here, in the normal process (FIG. 11), if it is determined in step S218 that the end wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219. In the bonus AT setting process, steps S1001 to S1004 in the bonus AT management process (FIG. 24) are executed. That is, when the bonus AT state flag is "0" and the value of the bonus AT number counter is 1 or more, the bonus AT counter is set to "30" and the bonus AT state flag is set to "1". Further, a bonus AT start command is transmitted to the sub MPU 82. As a result, when the bonus AT state is continuous, the new execution number of bonus AT state is started from the game immediately after the final game of the one execution number of bonus AT state is finished.

In addition, since the end wait time is interposed between the bonus AT state of one execution time and the bonus AT state of a new execution time as described above, it is possible to connect between the bonus AT states at the time of continuous operation. A period for executing various operations for the time of holiday is secured.

<The situation when the 1st special replay is won or missed>
Next, a situation in which the first special replay is won or missed in the post-CB internal state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 25A shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, FIG. 25B shows the execution period of the game when the first special replay win or failure result is obtained, and FIG. 25C shows other games. 25(d) shows a freeze period, and FIG. 25(e) shows a wait period.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the first special replay win is started, so that a freeze period (39 sec) occurs as shown in FIG. 25(d). During this freeze period, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Then, at the timing of t2, the freeze period ends, as shown in FIG. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the current game ends, so that the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 25(a).

After that, at a timing of t4, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 25C, so that the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started as shown in FIG. 25E. To be done. During the wait period, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. Then, at the timing of t5, the wait period ends, as shown in FIG. In this case, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 25C, the current game ends.

After that, at a timing of t7 when the bonus AT state continues, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the game which has been the first special replay winning is restarted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25(d), the freeze period occurs from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, while as shown in FIG. 25(e), from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. No wait period will occur in the next game that continues.

That is, even if the first special replay is won, the wait period is generated in the situation other than the bonus AT state, but the wait period is not generated in the situation being the bonus AT state. As a result, when the first special replay win occurs in a situation other than the bonus AT state, the execution period of the production corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state is ensured in order to appropriately enhance the player's sense of superiority, while the bonus When the first special replay win occurs in the AT state, by omitting the period, it is possible to increase the sense of speed of the game in the bonus AT state.

After that, at the timing of t11 after the end of the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. 25B, the game in which the lottery result is out of result is started. In this case, a freeze period occurs from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. 25(d), and further from timing t13 to timing t14 as shown in FIG. 25(e). , A wait period occurs in this game. At the timing t14, which is the timing at which the wait period ends, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the game with the out-of-match result ends, and as shown in FIG. 25(a), the bonus AT state starts. To be done. Then, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 25C, a new game is started under the bonus AT state.

<State when the second special replay win or the third special replay win is achieved>
Next, a state in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is achieved in the post-CB internal state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

26A shows the execution period in the normal AT state, FIG. 26B shows the execution period in the bonus AT state, and FIG. 26C shows the second special replay win or the third special replay win. 26D shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 26D shows the execution period of the other games, and FIG. 26E shows the wait period.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), the game that has become the second special replay win or the third special replay win is started at the timing of t1 in the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 26(a). .. Then, at the timing of t2, the game ends as shown in FIG. 26(c), so that the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 26(a), and as shown in FIG. 26(b). Thus, the bonus AT state is started.

After that, at a timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 26(d), so that the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started as shown in FIG. 26(e). To be done. During the wait period, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the wait period ends, as shown in FIG. In this case, the bet setting by the previous replay winning is performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 26D, the current game ends.

After that, at the timing of t6 when the bonus AT state continues, as shown in FIG. 26C, the game which has become the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t7, and the next game starts at the timing of t8. However, the wait period does not occur in the game.

That is, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is achieved, the wait period is generated in a situation other than the bonus AT state, but the wait period is not generated in a situation in the bonus AT state. As a result, when the second special replay win or the third special replay win occurs in the situation where the bonus AT state is not set, the execution period of the effect corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state in order to appropriately enhance the superiority of the player. On the other hand, if the second special replay win or the third special replay win occurs in the bonus AT state, the period can be omitted to increase the speed of the game in the bonus AT state. Becomes

After that, at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the bonus AT state is not completed and the normal AT state is not established, as shown in FIG. 26C, the game that has become the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is Be started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t10, and as shown in FIG. 26(d), the next game is executed at the timing of t11. However, the wait period does not occur in the game. Furthermore, even if the game ends, the transition to the bonus AT state does not occur.

That is, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is achieved in a situation where the normal AT state is not established, it does not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit for the player of staying in the normal AT state and increase the degree of attention to the normal AT state. In addition, the wait period is not generated in such a situation that does not trigger the shift to the bonus AT state, so that a wait period for performance is generated in a situation where no profit is generated for the player. Is suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Relationship between CB state and bonus AT state>
Next, the relationship between the in-CB state and the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

27(a) shows the setting status of the CB winning flag, FIG. 27(b) shows the execution period of the in-CB state, FIG. 27(c) shows the execution period of the game resulting from the disconnection, and FIG. 27(e) shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 27(e) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 27(f) shows the timing at which the number of games is counted.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), at the timing of t1 under the condition that the CB winning flag is set to "1", the game of the deviation result is started as shown in FIG. 27(b), and the timing of t2. Then, the game is finished. In this case, a CB prize is generated at the end of the game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, not only the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 27E but also the CB winning flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the in-CB state is also started. In this case, since the CB state is prioritized as the gaming state, the specified number of bet numbers, the details of the lottery process, the reel control mode, and the payout amount at the time of winning the small winning combination are set to those in the CB state. .. However, the progress of the bonus AT state is not waited, and the number of games executed in the CB state is consumed as the game in the bonus AT state.

After that, in the CB state and the bonus AT state, the game is executed at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4 as shown in FIGS. 27D and 27F, and the number of games is increased. Is counted. As a result, the digestion of the game in the CB state and the digestion of the game in the bonus AT state occur at the same time. Then, at the timing of t5, the small winning combination is generated 19 times in the CB state, so that the CB state is ended as shown in FIG. 27(b). As a result, only the bonus AT state is obtained. However, as shown in FIG. 27A, since the CB winning flag is in the state of “0” and is in the CB non-internal state, the main MPU 72 executes the process of advancing the bonus AT state, but the sub MPU 82. Then, the notification of the pushing order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning is not executed.

After that, at the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 27(f), the game is executed in the CB non-internal state and the bonus AT state, and the number of games is Is counted. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 27A, the CB winning combination is won and the CB winning flag is set to "1". As a result, not only the main MPU 72 executes the process of advancing the bonus AT state, but also the sub MPU 82 notifies the pushing order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

<Execution control of various notifications and effects in sub-side MPU 82>
Next, a processing configuration of the sub-side MPU 82 for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

<Periodic processing>
First, the periodic process executed in the sub-side MPU 82 periodically (for example, 2 msec period) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In step S1101, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main MPU 72. When a positive determination is made in step S1101, the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1102. The ring buffer is a buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands, and the write pointer is updated and read every time the write process is executed while the command write process to the area indicated by the write pointer is executed. A command read process from the area indicated by the pointer is executed, and the read pointer is updated each time the read process is executed. The reading point is updated when the command is read in one processing cycle of the cyclic processing and when the cyclic processing of the next processing cycle is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the processing of step S1102 is executed, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the internal post-CB state. The sub-side MPU 82 identifies that the internal post-CB state has started by receiving a lottery result command corresponding to the CB winning combination from the main-side MPU 72, as described later, and receives the CB start command to determine the internal CB. Determine that the post-state has ended.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1103, then in step S1104 it is checked whether the sub-side MPU 82 is executing AT control by checking the flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. To judge. When the negative determination is made in step S1104, the non-AT processing is executed in step S1105, and when the positive determination is made in step S1104, the AT processing is executed in step S1106. These non-AT processing and AT processing will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1103, the process of step S1105 is executed, or the process of step S1106 is executed, in step S1107, the freeze period and the wait period are set in the main MPU 72. The standby effect setting process for executing the corresponding effect and notification is executed, and in step S1108, the CB setting process for executing the effect and notification corresponding to the CB in-progress state. To execute.

After that, in step S1109, the display data setting process for executing the effect and the notification by displaying the moving image or the still image on the image display device 66 is executed, and in step S1110, the upper lamp 64 and the privilege points. The light emission data setting process for performing the light emission control of the notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the number-of-wins notification unit 69 is executed, and at step S1111, sound and voice for production and notification are output through the speaker 65. The setting process of the sound output data for executing is executed. Then, this cycle process is ended.

<Standby performance setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process of step S1107 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result command corresponding to the first special replay win is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, in step S1202, the first freeze flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then this standby effect setting process is ended. By setting the first freeze flag to "1", it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the first freeze time (39 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be read is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and signals are output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time is performed on the image display device 66. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the first freeze time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time in the image display device 66.

When a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the lottery result command corresponding to the disconnection result is received from the main MPU 72 in the CB internal rear state. If the lottery result command has been received, in step S1204, the second freeze flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then this standby effect setting process ends. By setting the second freeze flag to "1", it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the second freeze time (35 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The data table to be read is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and signals are output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the second freeze time is performed on the image display device 66. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the second freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the second freeze time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect on the image display device 66.

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the start wait command is received from the main MPU 72. When the start wait command is received, in step S1206 the start wait flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then this standby effect setting process ends. By setting the start wait flag to "1", the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the start wait time (8 sec). The table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and signals are output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the start wait time is performed on the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that the shift to the bonus AT state has occurred is performed. In addition, the light emission data corresponding to the start wait time is read in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) is started. The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect corresponding to the start wait time in the image display device 66.

When a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1207 whether or not the bonus AT end command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT end command is received, in step S1208, the bonus AT end flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then this standby effect setting process is ended. By setting the bonus AT end flag to "1", the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the end wait time (5 sec). The data table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and signals are output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the end wait time is performed on the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that one set in the bonus AT state is completed is performed. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the end wait time is read out, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the process ends. The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect corresponding to the end wait time in the image display device 66.

When a negative determination is made in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the condominium unit wait command is received from the main MPU 72. As described later, the continuous game wait command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the output state of the AT1 signal set to the ON state is once set to the OFF state and then set to the ON state again. When the output of the AT1 signal is set, the main unit MPU 72 sets the extended game wait time (1 sec).

When the extended game wait command is not received, this standby effect setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the continuous game wait command has been received, then in step S1210, the standby game wait flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then this standby effect setting process ends. By setting "1" in the extended game wait flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a still image corresponding to the extended game wait time (1 sec). The data table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and signals are output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the extended game wait time is performed on the image display device 66.

<CB setting processing>
Next, the CB setting process of step S1108 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the winning result command corresponding to the CB winning combination and the CB non-winning is received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command is received, in step S1302, the CB internal flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". As a result, it becomes possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that it is in the post-CB internal state.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301 or when the processing of step S1302 is executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not a CB start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the CB start command is received, in step S1304, "1" is set to the in-CB flag provided in the sub RAM 84, and in step S1305, the CB internal flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1." 0” is cleared. This allows the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that it is in the CB in-progress state.

Further, by setting the CB flag to “1”, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the data table that enables the display of the moving image corresponding to the CB state is displayed. The signal is read from the sub-side ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the in-CB state is performed on the image display device 66. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the CB in-progress state is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), CB is performed. The sound output data corresponding to the middle state is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state in the image display device 66.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303 or when the processing of step S1305 is executed, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not "1" is set in the CB flag of the sub RAM 84. If the CB flag is set to "1", the effect content update process is executed in step S1307. In the update process of the effect contents, a process for updating the display of the number of remaining small winning combinations in the CB displayed on the image display device 66 in response to receiving the prize result command from the main MPU 72. Along with the execution, processing for notifying the information of the winning combination is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1306 or when the processing of step S1307 is executed, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not a CB end command is received from the main MPU 72. If the CB end command has not been received, the CB setting process is ended as it is, and if the CB end command has been received, after the CB flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" in step S1309, , This CB setting process ends. As a result, the effect corresponding to the in-CB state in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is ended.

<Processing during non-AT in sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the contents of processing during non-AT executed in the sub MPU 82 will be described. Prior to the description of the specific processing content executed by the sub MPU 82, the mode of transition from the non-AT state to the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31.

As a mode of transitioning to a situation in which the internal post-CB state is in the non-AT state (hereinafter referred to as normal state ST11) and a state in which the internal post-CB state is in the normal AT state (hereinafter referred to as normal AT state ST12) There are three types of modes.

The first transition mode is when the sub RAM 84 is initialized, when the normal AT state ST12 ends and transitions to the normal state ST11, or when the bonus AT state ST17 ends and the normal AT state ST12 ends. This is a case where the number of ceiling games determined by lottery in the sub-side MPU 82 is exhausted in the case of transitioning to the normal state ST11 without transition. When transitioning to the normal AT state ST12 in this manner, first the transition to the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is performed, and then the ceiling game number is exhausted (ST14), whereby the normal AT state ST12 is obtained. The ceiling game omen state ST13 is entered when the number of ceiling games is 32. In the ceiling game omen state ST13, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 66, an effect having a higher expectation of transition to the normal AT state ST12 than in the normal state ST11 and not the ceiling game omen state ST13. It is easy to execute.

Even if the number of remaining ceiling games is not 32 games, the false omen state is obtained by winning the false omen lottery in the sub MPU 82. In the false omen state, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 66, the degree of expectation of transition to the normal AT state ST12, rather than the normal state ST11, which is neither the ceiling game omen state ST13 nor the false omen state. It is easy to execute high performance.

The second transition mode is an activation win in an activation lottery process executed when a predetermined winning combination is won, and the transition chance state ST16 is entered, and in the transition chance state ST16, a replay combination win is selected. This is a case where a transition win is achieved in the transition lottery process executed when the change comes. However, if the ending condition of the transition chance state ST16 is satisfied without the transition being won, the normal state ST11 is restored without shifting to the normal AT state ST12. In the transition opportunity state ST16, a display effect for clearly showing to the player that it is the transition opportunity state ST16 is executed by the image display device 66.

When shifting to the transition chance state ST16, first, the state shifts to the transition chance precursory state ST15, and when the number of games for the precursor is exhausted in the transition chance precursory state ST15, the transitional chance state ST16 shifts. In the transitional chance precursory state ST15, the effect content of each game on the image display device 66 is such that the expectation of transition to the transitional opportunity state ST16 is higher than that in the normal state ST11 and not the transitional chance precursory state ST15. It is easy to execute.

Even in a situation where the transition chance precursory state ST15 is not established, the false precursory state is obtained by winning the false precursory lottery in the sub MPU 82. In the false omen state, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 66, the degree of expectation of transition to the transition opportunity state ST16 is higher than in the normal state ST11 and neither the transition chance omen state ST15 nor the false omen state. It is easy to execute high performance.

The third transition mode is a case where the transition is made to the bonus AT state ST17 and after the bonus AT state ST17 is completed. However, when the bonus AT state ST17 is shifted under the penalty situation described later, the normal AT state ST12 is not shifted even if the bonus AT state ST17 is ended. A transition from the normal AT state ST12 to the bonus AT state ST17 may occur.

<Non-AT processing>
Next, the non-AT processing in step S1105 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub RAM 84 in step S1402.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401 or when the processing of step S1402 is executed, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not a stop command command is received from the main MPU 72. When the stop command command is received, in step S1404, stop order data is written in the sub RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1403, or if the processing of step S1404 is executed, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the non-AT processing is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current winning result command corresponds to the shift to the bonus AT state. Specifically, when the data indicating that the first special replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state is specified from the winning result command, or the data indicating that the result is a disconnection result in the CB internal rear state is displayed. If specified from the winning result command, a positive determination is made in step S1406. In addition, data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the situation where the CB internal rear state and the AT1 signal are ON is specified from the winning result command. Also, when the stop order data stored in the sub RAM 84 specifies that the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether or not the winning result command includes data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won. To do. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1407, this means that the shift to the bonus AT state this time has occurred under the penalty situation.

Specifically, as a result of stopping the reels other than the left reel 32L as the first stop even though the sub-side MPU 82 is not in the AT state, the first bell winning or the second bell winning is generated three times, As will be described later, when the AT1 signal is turned on, and under that situation, the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won and the first reel is stopped except for the left reel 32L, the main MPU 72 has a game. The state is shifted to the bonus AT state. However, since this event is a penalty target event, the sub-side MPU 82 does not set the AT state. Therefore, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, the penalty AT flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S1408. The penalty AT flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that it is in the bonus AT state generated under the penalty situation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1407 or if the process of step S1408 is executed, in step S1409, the bonus AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1” and the sub-side RAM 84 is also set. "4" is set in the provided execution target counter. The bonus AT flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the gaming state managed by the main MPU 72 is the bonus AT state, and the execution target counter indicates the processing content to be executed in the AT state. It is a counter for specifying by the side MPU 82. When the execution target counter is set to “4”, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the process for advancing the bonus AT state. After that, this non-AT processing is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1410 whether a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the post-CB internal state and the non-AT state, and any prize is generated. When a penalty event occurs, the actual medal award rate may be higher than the medal award rate in the non-AT state set at the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, the player is disadvantaged so that the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop in the non-AT state.

When a penalty event occurs, the image data for the penalty is set in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28) and the sound output data setting process (step S1111). The sound output data for penalty is set at. This notifies the player that a penalty event has occurred.

If a penalty event has occurred, in step S1411, addition processing to the penalty counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is executed. In the addition processing, “5”, which is a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to the penalty, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. After that, this non-AT processing is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S1410, the transition chance management process is executed in step S1412, and the ceiling game management process is executed in step S1413. Then, in step S1414, the winning-corresponding process is executed, and then the non-AT processing is ended. In the prize-winning process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. Perform the processing to do so.

<Transition opportunity management process>
Next, the transition chance management process of step S1412 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the transition chance management process is activated on condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, it is activated at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the transition opportunity state is in progress by determining whether or not the value of the transition opportunity counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. The transition opportunity counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is in the transition opportunity state and the timing of ending the transition opportunity state. If it is not in the transition chance state, in step S1502, it is determined whether or not the value of the transition standby counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more to determine whether or not the transition chance precursor state is in progress. To judge. The shift standby counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify whether or not the shift chance is in the precursory state and the timing of ending the transitional chance.

When it is not in the transition chance precursory state, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the transition opportunity activation trigger combination has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV=7, 9-12 and 14-16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the transition opportunity activating trigger. However, even if the winning of the transition opportunity activating trigger combination is achieved, if the transition to the bonus AT state has been triggered, a positive determination is not made in step S1503.

When a positive determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of steps S1505 to S1508 is not executed, so that the transition opportunity state transition trigger does not occur. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the activation lottery table corresponding to both the current transition opportunity activation trigger combination and the number of exhausted games since the previous transition to the non-AT state is read from the sub-side ROM 83. Then, in step S1506, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the activation lottery table.

Here, in the triggered lottery table, 0, 1, 2, and 3 times are set as the number of remaining transfer opportunities. Further, in the triggered lottery table, the larger the value of the winning IV is, the higher the probability that one or more transition chance remaining counts will be selected and the higher the number of transition chance remaining counts that will be selected will be. The probability of selecting one or more as the remaining number of transition chances and the probability of selecting a larger number of remaining number of transition opportunities as the number of exhausted games after the previous transition to the non-AT state are increased. It is set to be high.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining transfer opportunities is selected one or more times in the activation lottery process of step S1506. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, in step S1508, the number of remaining transfer opportunities selected in the current activation lottery process is added to the remaining transfer chance counter provided in the sub RAM 84. The transition opportunity remaining counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify whether or not there is an opportunity to transition to the transition opportunity state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or the process of step S1508 is executed, the sub-side RAM 84 is produced in step S1509. It is determined whether or not the value of the transition opportunity remaining counter of 1 is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the present transition opportunity management processing is ended, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. The remaining ceiling game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining ceiling games in the sub MPU 82. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1510, this transition opportunity management processing is terminated without setting the transition opportunity precursory state. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such as the transition to the transition opportunity state or the stay in the transition opportunity state immediately before the transition to the normal AT state occurs due to the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games. It is possible to prevent multiple triggers for shifting to the state.

When a negative determination is made in step S1510, the number of continuous games in the transition chance precursor state is set to "10" in the transition standby counter of the sub RAM 84 in step S1511. As a result, a transition opportunity is in the forefront. Then, this transfer opportunity management process is completed. When the value of the shift standby counter is 1 or more, the effect content of the image display device 66 is set to the content corresponding to the precursory state of the transition opportunity.

When the state of the transition opportunity sign is reached, a positive determination is made in step S1502, and the flow advances to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, this transition chance management process is ended as it is. As a result, in the penalty state, the number of continuing games in the transition chance precursor state is not exhausted, and the transition to the transition opportunity state is delayed.

If the value of the penalty counter is "0", the value of the transition standby counter of the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1513, and the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in subsequent step S1514. Is determined. When a negative determination is made in step S1514, the present transition chance management processing is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S1515.

In step S1515, 1 is subtracted from the value of the transfer chance remaining counter of the sub RAM 84. In a succeeding step S1516, "10" which is the number of continuous games in the transition chance state is set in the transition chance counter of the sub RAM 84. As a result, a transition opportunity state is set. Then, this transfer opportunity management process is completed. When the value of the transition chance counter is 1 or more, the display effect for clearly showing to the player that the image display device 66 is in the transition opportunity state is executed.

If a transition opportunity state is reached, an affirmative decision is made in step S1501 and the operation proceeds to step S1517. In step S1517, processing during the transition opportunity is executed. Then, this transfer opportunity management process is completed.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process during the transition opportunity.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not an expectation improving combination has been won. The expectation improving role is the same as the transition opportunity activating trigger role determined in step S1503 in the transition opportunity management process (FIG. 33). That is, in the case of winning in any of IV=7, 9-12, and 14-16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14 ), it is determined that the expectation improving role has been won. However, even if the winning of the expectation improving combination is achieved, if the transition to the bonus AT state is triggered, a positive determination is not made in step S1601.

When a positive determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1603 to S1606 is not executed, so that the setting trigger for improving the degree of expectation does not occur. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, a transition probability UP lottery process is executed. In the transition probability UP lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the probability of being a transition win is increased by one stage in the transition lottery process of step S1609 described later. It should be noted that the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process in step S1609 is set to 1/10, 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, and 5/10. Specifically, regarding the processing content of the transition probability UP lottery process, first, the transition probability UP lottery table corresponding to the present expectation improving role is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The transfer probability UP lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV is, the higher the probability of becoming the transfer probability UP is. In the transition probability UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the transition probability UP lottery table. Collate.

In step S1604, it is determined whether the transition probability UP has been won. When the transition probability UP is won, in step S1605, the transition lottery table referred to in step S1609, which will be described later, is changed to a table in which the probability of transition winning is one step higher than the current table. As a result, the probability of winning the transition is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S1604, or if the process of step S1605 is executed, a value corresponding to the winning combination of this time is set in the delay counter provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1606. The delay counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify whether or not to delay the timing of ending the transition chance state. When the value of the winning IV is "7", "1", "3", "5", "7", "10" are set as the values set in step S1606. When “1” is selected and the winning IV value is “9” or “10”, “3” is selected, and when the winning IV value is “11” or “12” Is selected as "5", and if the value of the winning IV is "14" or "15", "7" is selected, and if the value of the winning IV is "16" “10” is selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601, a positive determination is made in step S1602, or if the process of step S1606 is executed, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not a normal replay combination has been won. When the normal replay combination is won, it is determined in step S1608 whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of step S1609 and step S1610 is not executed, so that the trigger for executing the transfer lottery process does not occur. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, a transition lottery process is executed. In the transfer lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the currently read transfer lottery table. Collate. Then, in step S1610, it is determined whether or not the transition is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S1607, an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, or a negative determination is made in step S1610, the value of the delay counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more in step S1611. Determine if there is. If the value of the delay counter is 1 or more, the value of the delay counter is decremented by 1 in step S1612, and then the process during the transition opportunity ends. If the value of the delay counter is "0", the value of the transition chance counter of the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1613, and then the process during the transition opportunity is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1610 that the transfer is a win, the process of setting the transfer to the normal AT state in steps S1614 to S1617 is executed. Specifically, in step S1614, "1" is set to the normal AT flag provided in the sub RAM 84. The normal AT flag is a flag for specifying that the sub-side MPU 82 is in the normal AT state.

In a succeeding step S1615, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of starting the normal AT is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of starting the normal AT is read from the sub-side ROM 83. There are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as one set of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the time of starting the normal AT, the probability that 30 games are selected as one set of continuous games is 5/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are The probability of being selected is 1/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT. Match against.

In the following step S1616, the value of the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S1615 is set in the normal AT game counter provided in the sub RAM 84. The normal AT game counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of continuous games in one set of the normal AT state.

In a succeeding step S1617, the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". By setting “0” in the execution target counter, the process for advancing the pre-branch AT state in the normal AT state is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. After that, the process during this transition opportunity ends.

<Ceiling game management processing>
Next, the ceiling game management processing of step S1413 in the non-AT processing (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the ceiling game management process is activated on condition that the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, it is activated at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game is in the precursory state by determining whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter of the sub RAM 84 is 32 or less. When a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1702, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1703, and then the main ceiling game management processing is ended. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the ceiling game number is not subtracted even if the game is exhausted.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1701 or a negative judgment is made in step S1702, the value of the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1704. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter after subtracting 1 is "0". If it is not “0”, the main ceiling game management process is ended as it is, and if it is “0”, after the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1706 to S1709 is executed. , The main ceiling game management process ends. The processing contents of these steps S1706 to S1709 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1614 to S1617 in the above-described processing during transition chance (FIG. 34). As a result, the normal AT state is entered.

<Processing during AT in sub MPU 82>
Next, the contents of processing in AT executed in the sub MPU 82 will be described. Prior to the description of the specific processing contents executed by the sub MPU 82, each gaming state included in the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 36.

As described above, the AT state includes the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22. In both of the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, when the winning of the first bell role or the second bell role is achieved in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72, those prizes can be won. The control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. However, in the normal AT state ST21, the start and end are set by the sub MPU 82 instead of the main MPU 72, whereas in the bonus AT state ST22, the start and end are set by the sub MPU 82 instead of the main MPU 82. It is performed by the side MPU 72.

Of these normal AT state ST21 and bonus AT state ST22, only one type of bonus AT state ST22 exists, whereas the normal AT state ST21 includes the pre-branching AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, and the branch AT state ST32. There are four types of states, the final chance state ST33 and the additional state ST34.

The pre-branching AT state ST31 is an AT state that continues for the number of continuous games set at the start thereof. In the pre-branching AT state ST31, a display effect for clearly showing to the player that it is the pre-branching AT state ST31 is executed by the image display device 66. In the pre-branching AT state ST31, the set number of continuous games is exhausted, and the process proceeds to the branch AT state ST32.

In the branched AT state ST32, a battle effect using the ally character and the enemy character is performed on the image display device 66. In the battle effect, when the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state ST21 is 1 or more, or when the AT continuous lottery process results in the AT continuous winning, the victory effect of the ally character or the drawing of both characters is performed as the battle effect. An effect is selected, and in other cases, the defeat effect of the teammate character is selected.

When the winning effect or the drawing effect is executed, the pre-branching AT state ST31 is restored, and when the defeat effect is executed, the final chance state ST33 is entered. In the final chance state ST33, a revival lottery process is executed according to the content of the winning combination of the game in the pre-branching AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32, and the content of the winning combination of the game in the final chance state ST33, and the revival winning is achieved. If so, the pre-branching AT state ST31 is restored.

In the pre-branching AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32, the state shifts to the addition state ST34 depending on the content of the winning combination of the game in these states. When the transition condition to the addition state ST34 is satisfied in the pre-branching AT state ST31, the game next to the game in which the transition condition is satisfied is transitioned to the addition state ST34 even in the middle of the pre-branching AT state ST31. On the other hand, when the condition for transitioning to the add-on state ST33 is satisfied in the middle of the branch AT state ST32, the transition to the add-on state ST34 is made after the end of the branch AT state ST32.

In the added-on state ST34, the display effect for clearly showing to the player that the added-on state ST34 is set is executed by the image display device 66. In the add-on state ST34, the add-on lottery processing is executed according to the winning combination of the game, and the number of sets in the normal AT state ST21 is increased by the addition-on lottery process. When the termination condition is satisfied in the addition state ST34, the pre-branching AT state ST31 is entered.

In any of the pre-branching AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, the final chance state ST33, and the addition state ST34, the main MPU 72 makes the transition setting to the bonus AT state ST22, and thereby shifts to the bonus AT state ST22. In the bonus AT state ST22, a display effect for clearly showing to the player that it is the bonus AT state ST22 is executed by the image display device 66. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, when the bonus AT state ST22 is entered, the pre-branch AT state ST31 is returned after the bonus AT state ST22 is ended, and in the branch AT state ST32, the bonus AT state ST22 is entered, the bonus is After the AT state ST22 ends, the branch AT state ST32 is returned to, and when the bonus AT state ST22 is shifted in the addition state ST34, the addition state ST34 is returned after the bonus AT state ST22 is ended. On the other hand, if the bonus AT state ST22 is entered in the final chance state ST33, the pre-branching AT state ST31 is entered after the bonus AT state ST22 is finished.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the AT process in step S1106 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written to the sub RAM 84 in step S1802.

After that, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and in step S1804, whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. Then, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won. When negative determinations are made in both step S1803 and step S1804, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, in step S1806, each stop button that enables the occurrence of the first bell prize or the second bell prize. The pushing order data of 42 to 44 are read from the contents of the lottery result command received this time and written in the sub RAM 84.

That is, in the bonus AT state in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is achieved in a situation other than the normal AT state and the middle reel 32M or 32R is stopped and operated as the first stop, each stop button 42 to 44 is pressed. The order is not announced. Further, in the normal AT state, which has shifted to a state where a penalty event has occurred, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not notified until the penalty game is exhausted. In addition, since the process in step AT1103 is executed in the periodic process (FIG. 28) and the process during main AT is not executed in a situation other than the internal post-CB state, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified in this case as well. Not done. On the other hand, in the AT state which is not under the penalty situation, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, under the AT state, the degree of expectation of medal provision is higher than in the other gaming states.

Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, the bell prize does not occur, but it is not treated as a penalty event. That is, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, the event of ending the AT state, temporarily interrupting the AT state, and decreasing the winning probability of the normal replay combination. Does not occur.

If a negative decision is made in step S1801, a positive decision is made in step S1803, an affirmative decision is made in step S1804, a negative decision is made in step S1805, or the process of step S1806 is executed. Determines in step S1807 whether a stop command command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the stop command command is received, in step S1808, stop order data is written in the sub RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1807 or if the processing of step S1808 is executed, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command is received, the winning-corresponding process is executed in step S1810. In the prize-winning process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. Perform the processing to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S1809 or the process of step S1810 is executed, the value of the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is grasped in step S1811. As described above, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the processing content to be executed in the AT state.

As processes executed by the sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state, a pre-branch AT state process for performing execution control of the pre-branch AT state (step S1812) and a branch AT state for performing execution control of the branch AT state Processing (step S1813), additional state processing for performing execution control of the additional state (step S1814), final chance processing for performing execution control of the final chance state (step S1815), and bonus AT state The bonus AT process (step S1816) for performing the execution control in the sub-side MPU 82 is set.

In such a processing configuration, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to know which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. In the address table, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in association with the numerical information of the execution target counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812), and the start address SA1 is the start of the program for executing the branch AT state process (step S1813). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the superimposition state process (step S1814), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the final chance process (step S1815). The start address SA4 is the start address of a program for executing the bonus AT process (step S1816). Hereinafter, each process of step S1812 to step S1816 will be described in detail.

<Process before branching AT state>
First, the pre-branching AT state process executed in step S1812 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, normal replay processing is executed. The details of the normal replay process will be described later, but they are processes for generating a trigger for changing the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 during the normal AT state vacation.

In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S1903. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed.

In a succeeding step S1904, after the privilege reference numerical value "7" is added to the privilege point counter provided in the sub RAM 84, the pre-branching AT state process is ended. The privilege point counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of times the normal AT state is set. The bonus point counter is added when the bonus lottery trigger is won in the normal AT state and the bonus point is won in the bonus point lottery process. Then, when the value of the privilege point counter is 7×n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more), the number of times the normal AT state is set is n times, and even if the current normal AT state ends, the normal AT state is set. Will be operated n times.

When a negative determination is made in step S1902, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command is received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1907, and then the pre-branch AT state process is terminated.

If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more in the pre-branching AT state, the AT preparation data is set in the display data setting process of step S1109 in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and the AT display device 66 sets the AT preparation data. An image indicating that it is being prepared is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the flow advances to step S1908 to execute the first addition processing. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first addition processing.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the bonus lottery trigger combination has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14 ), it is determined that the bonus lottery trigger has been won.

When a positive determination is made in step S2001, privilege point lottery processing is executed in step S2002. In the privilege point lottery process, the privilege point lottery table corresponding to the current privilege lottery trigger role is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as privilege points, and the greater the value of the winning IV is, the more privilege points are 1 or more. Is set to have a higher probability of being selected, and a larger value of the winning IV is set to have a higher probability of selecting a larger privilege point. In the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the privilege point lottery table. To do.

In a succeeding step S2003, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points are won. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the number of privilege points won this time is 2 or more. When a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, when the privilege point that has been won this time is "1", the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point that has been won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, a negative determination is made in step S2003, or the process of step S2005 is executed, the distribution flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S2006. It is determined whether or not is set. The distribution flag is used by the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that, when two or more privilege points are selected in the privilege point lottery process, the two or more privilege points must be divided and given to a plurality of consecutive games. Flag.

If the distribution flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written in the register of the sub MPU 82, and the privilege points distributed to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84.

If the privilege points that have been won this time are two or more, an affirmative decision is made in step S2004 and the operation proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, distribution lottery processing is executed. In the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table corresponding to the current privilege points is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. The value of the lottery counter is collated with the distribution lottery table. For example, when the selected privilege point is "2", the probability that 2 is added to the privilege point counter in this game is 1/2, and the privilege point counter is calculated in each of the current game and the next game. The probability that 1 is added to is 1/2. When the selected privilege points are 3 or more, the addition to the privilege point counter may be distributed over three or more consecutive games including the current game.

In a succeeding step S2009, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution lottery process is the distribution winning result. That is, it is determined whether or not the addition to the privilege point counter is distributed to a plurality of consecutive games. If a negative decision is made in step S2009, the operation proceeds to step S2005 already described.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, in step S2010, the distribution flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and distribution data indicating the distribution mode of the privilege points selected this time is stored in the sub RAM 84. Write. Then, in step S2011, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points distributed to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

If a negative determination is made in step S2006, the process of step S2007 is executed, or the process of step S2011 is executed, after the addition state setting process is executed in step S2012, the first addition The process ends.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the addition state.

In step S2101, calculation processing is executed for the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before stored in the register of the sub MPU 82 in step S2005, step S2007, or step S2011 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value in the normal AT state (specifically, “7”).

In a succeeding step S2102, calculation processing is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value in the normal AT state (specifically, “7”).

After that, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2102 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2101. In the configuration where the value of privilege points that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the reference value for addition, the value after the addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than the value before addition It means that the privilege points, which were larger than 7×(n−1) and smaller than 7×n, became 7×n or more by the addition of the counter (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that the number of times of setting in the normal AT state is added.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, the setting process of the actual addition state is ended as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, the addition state flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". In a succeeding step S2105, "2" is set in the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84. By setting the execution target counter to "2", the additional state process in step S1814 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

In a succeeding step S2106, lottery processing for the number of compensation replays is executed. In the add-on state, the number of times the normal AT state is set tends to be added, but the add-on state ends when the number of times of normal replay winning reaches the number of compensation replays. The lottery process for the number of compensation replays is a process for randomly determining the number of compensation replays that triggers the end of the additional state at the time of transition to the additional state.

In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the addition state is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table at the time of shifting to the addition state, "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of compensation replays, "1" is selected with a probability of 6/10, and a probability of 3/10. "2" is selected by, and "3" is selected with a probability of 1/10.

After the lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed in step S2106, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is set in the compensation replay number counter provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S2107. The compensation replay number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining compensation replay number in the sub-side MPU 82. After that, the setting process of the additional state is ended.

Here, as described above, the number of sets in the normal AT state is added in accordance with the privilege points, but as described above, the front door 12 includes points for which the number of sets in the privilege points has not yet been added. A privilege point notifying unit 67 for notifying and a stock notifying unit 68 for notifying the number of times the normal AT state is set are provided. The light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68 according to the privilege points is executed by the notification control process in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) of the periodic process (FIG. 28).

FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the notification control process.

In the notification control process, first, in step S2201, the calculation process is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value in the normal AT state (specifically, “7”).

In a succeeding step S2202, the stock notification table stored in the sub-side ROM 83 is referred to, thereby identifying the quotient of the calculation result in step S2201, that is, the group corresponding to the remaining set number in the normal AT state. As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 41(b), the stock notification table has a correspondence relationship between the display color of the stock notification unit 68 and the numerical range of the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state (quotient of the above calculation result). It is set. Specifically, the remaining set number of 0 times corresponds to white, the remaining set number of 1 to 3 times corresponds to blue, and the remaining set number of 4 to 6 times corresponds to yellow. , The remaining set number of 7 to 9 corresponds to green, the remaining set number of 10 to 11 corresponds to red, and the remaining set number of 12 or more corresponds to rainbow color.

In step S2202, it is determined to which group the quotient value derived in step S2201 belongs in the stock notification table. Then, in step S2203, the display color data corresponding to the grasped group is read from the sub-side ROM 83 and written in the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, the stock notification unit 68 is controlled to emit light so that the display color corresponds to the display color data.

In the following step S2204, the remainder of the calculation result of step S2201 described above, that is, the points that have not been added to the set number of privilege points, are specified. Then, the light emission data corresponding to the specified points is written in the sub RAM 84, so that the number of unit point display units 67a corresponding to the specified points are turned on. Light emission control is performed.

After that, in step S2205, the emission data corresponding to the value of the victory counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is written in the sub RAM 84, so that the number of unit victory number display portions 69a corresponding to the value of the victory counter is displayed. The light emission control of the winning number notification unit 69 is performed so that the light is turned on. The victory counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of times the win effect has been achieved in the battle effect in the AT state which continues without becoming the non-AT state. Then, this notification control processing is completed.

With reference to FIG. 42, the manner in which bonus points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the AT state before branch will be described. FIG. 42(A) is a timing chart showing how bonus points are distributed and added, FIG. 42(a) shows an execution period of a game in which bonus points are won, and FIG. 42(b) is another game. 42C shows the state of the privilege point counter, and FIG. 42D shows the execution period of the additional state. 42(B1) to FIG. 42(B4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the light emission modes of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the game for winning the bonus points is started at the timing of t1 in the AT state before branching, and the game is finished at the timing of t2. In this case, in the situation where the value of the privilege point counter is already “4”, 3 points are selected as the privilege points to be added, and further, distribution data for adding 1 point each in 3 consecutive games including the game is set. To be done. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the value of the privilege point counter increases by “1” as shown in FIG. 42(c). As a result, as shown in FIG. 42(B1), from the state in which the number of unit point display portions 67a that are in the lighting state on each of the left side and the right side is four, as shown in FIG. 42(B2), The number of the unit point display portions 67a is five.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), one game ends at each of the timings of t3 and t4, so that at each timing, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the privilege point counter The value increases by "1". As a result, in the privilege point notification unit 67, the number of unit point display units 67a that are turned on on the left side and the right side are increased by one, as shown in FIGS. 42(B3) and 42(B4). By increasing the value of the privilege point counter in this manner, the value of the privilege point counter becomes “7” at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 42(c). As a result, the addition state is started from the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 42(d).

Further, since the value of the privilege point counter becomes “7”, the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes 1, so that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed as shown in FIG. 42(B4). , Specifically, it becomes blue. With this, the player confirms that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is blue, and thereby understands that the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more and 3 or less. Become.

Returning to the description of the pre-branching AT state process (FIG. 38), after the first addition process is executed in step S1908, the value of the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is “2” in step S1909. Or not. When the value of the execution target counter is “2”, it means that the transition to the addition state has occurred as a result of the first addition processing in step S1908. In this case, the pre-branching AT state processing is ended without executing the processing from step S1910.

If a negative decision is made in step S1909, the operation proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the value of the normal AT game counter of the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1. Then, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter after subtracting 1 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1911, the processing for the pre-branch AT state is ended as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, the branch AT state setting processing is executed in step S1912, and then The processing for the AT state before branching ends.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the branch AT state.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the value of the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is 7 or more, the value of the privilege point counter is decremented by 7 in step S2302.

In a succeeding step S2303, battle lottery processing is executed. In the battle lottery process, the battle lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Match against the battle lottery table. In the battle lottery table, a win effect and a draw effect are set as battle effects, and the probability of winning effect is 1/2 and the probability of being a draw effect is 1/2. ..

In a succeeding step S2304, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The branch AT game counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of continuous games in the branch AT state, which is any of 10 to 13 games in the case of winning effect and 10 in the case of drawing effect. Or 11 games. In the battle lottery process, not only one of the winning effect and the draw effect is selected, but also the number of continuing games in the case of the winning effect and the number of continuing games in the case of the drawing effect are selected.

Further, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is displayed on the sub side. The signal is read from the ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data setting process in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111). In (), the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect on the image display device 66.

Then, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in step S2303 is a winning effect win. If the winning effect is won, the value of the winning counter of the sub RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S2306. Note that when the notification control process (FIG. 41A) is executed as described above, and when the value of the victory counter is incremented by 1, the victory number notification unit 69 is accordingly matched with the unit victory in the lit state. The number display section 69a is increased by one.

In a succeeding step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after adding 1 is "12". If the number is 12, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

The AT continuation probability is the probability that an AT continuation win will occur in the AT continuation lottery processing for determining whether or not to continue the normal AT state in the situation where the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is “0”. is there. Specifically, 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88% are set as the probability that the AT will continue to be won. The AT continuation probability that is initially set when the non-AT state shifts to the normal AT state differs depending on the mode that triggered the shift to the normal AT state.

For example, in the case of transition from the transition chance state to the normal AT state, the AT continuation probability is selected to select 50% with a probability of 90/100, and 60% with a probability of 8/100. 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. Also, when the number of games in the ceiling has been exhausted and the normal AT state is entered, a lottery of the AT continuation probability is performed, and thus 50% is selected with a probability of 80/100, and with a probability of 18/100. 60% is selected and 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. Also, if the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won and the bonus AT state is entered and then the normal AT state is entered, 77% is selected, and the first special replay role is won and the bonus If the state shifts to the AT state and then shifts to the normal AT state, 82% is selected, and if the shift result shifts to the bonus AT state and then shifts to the normal AT state, the highest probability is 88%. Is selected. That is, when the transition to the normal AT state is triggered by the transition to the bonus AT state, the initially set AT continuation probability is higher than when the direct transition to the normal AT state is made.

As described above, the AT continuation probability is set when shifting to the normal AT state, but in the normal AT state that is continuous without becoming the non-AT state, the winning effect has occurred 12 times which is the predetermined number of executions. In this case, the AT continuation probability is set to 88% of the highest probability. As a result, when a win effect is produced in the battle effect, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is fixed but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given. Therefore, the player produces the victory effect in the battle effect. It is expected that the game will be played and the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, AT continuous lottery processing is executed in step S2309. In the AT continuous lottery process, first, an AT continuous lottery table corresponding to the currently set AT continuous probability is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84. The value is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the AT continuous lottery table.

In a succeeding step S2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the AT continuous lottery process is AT continuous winning. If the AT is continuously won, the battle lottery process is executed in step S2311, and the value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84 in step S2312. The flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The processing contents of steps S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2303 and S2304. Further, the content of the battle effect in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is the same as the content described in the case of step S2303 and step S2304.

In a succeeding step S2313, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery processing in the step S2311 is a winning effect winning. If the winning effect is won, the value of the winning counter of the sub RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S2314. Then, in step S2315, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter is "12". When the value of the victory counter is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

On the other hand, when the value of the victory counter is not "12", the process proceeds to step S2316. In step S2316, an AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed. In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is promoted as described above. Check against the lottery table. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of winning the promotion is set to 6/10. Then, in step S2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion lottery process is the promotion winning, and if it is the promotion winning, the AT continuation probability is set to one step higher in step S2318.

As described above, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed when the win effect is obtained in the battle effect, and is not executed when the draw effect is achieved. As a result, when a win effect is produced in the battle effect, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is fixed but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given. Therefore, the player produces the victory effect in the battle effect. It is expected that the game will be played and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is not executed when the normal AT state continues due to the value of the privilege point counter being 7 or more, and when the AT continuation lottery process results in AT continuation winning. Executed. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, so that the player can check the progress of the battle effect with peace of mind. On the other hand, when the AT continuous lottery process is executed, the normal AT state may be terminated when the AT is out of continuation, so the player confirms the progress content of the battle production while expecting to be a victory production or a draw production. Will be done. In this case, by performing the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process on condition that the AT continuation lottery process has been the AT continuation win and the winning effect has been achieved, the feeling of being elevated to the AT continuation win is further enhanced. It will be possible to increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, if the AT continuation lottery process in step S2309 results in a failure to continue AT, and a negative determination is made in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, a value corresponding to the defeat effect is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and "1" is set in the defeat effect flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84.

Further, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is displayed on the sub side. The signal is read from the ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data setting process in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111). In (), the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65 perform the light emission effect and the sound output effect according to the display effect on the image display device 66.

Here, the number of games set in the branch AT game counter when the defeat production is executed is “10”. On the other hand, the number of games set in the win effect is 10 to 13, and the number of games set in the draw effect is 10 or 11. The branch AT state continues for the number of games set in the branch AT game counter, and during the branch AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the AT process. Then, the winning effect or the drawing effect is not limited to simply continuing the normal AT state, and the period itself in which the processing for AT is executed may be longer than that in the defeating effect. As a result, the advantage of being a winning effect or a drawing effect is further enhanced, and the degree of attention to the battle effect is increased.

If a negative decision is made in step S2305, a negative decision is made in step S2307, a process of step S2308 is executed, a negative decision is made in step S2313, a negative decision is made in step S2317, a step is made. If the process of S2318 has been executed or the process of step S2319 has been executed, in step S2320, the branch AT state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the sub-side RAM 84 is executed. After setting the value of the target counter to “1”, the setting process of the branch AT state is ended. As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the branch AT state process of step S1813 is executed.

<Process for branch AT state>
Next, the branch AT state process executed in step S1813 of the in-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push-order avoiding process will be described in detail later, but is for preventing the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal, even when the normal AT-state condominium does not occur. Processing.

In a succeeding step S2402, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2403. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed.

In a succeeding step S2404, the data of the battle effect which has already been set in the current branch AT state is stored and held in the sub RAM 84. In this case, in the battle effect data stored and held, when the current branch AT state is started, the value of the branch AT game counter set in the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812) and the battle effect data The state of the flag corresponding to the type and the control data of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 from the start game to the end game of the battle effect in the current branched AT state are included. As a result, when returning to the branched AT state after the bonus AT state ends, it is possible to restart the battle effect in the branched AT state that was performed before the bonus AT state was started. After that, in step S2405, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the processing for the pre-branching AT state is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command is not received, the main branch AT state process is ended as it is, and when the winning result command is received, the second addition process is executed in step S2407. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second addition processing.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the bonus lottery trigger combination has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14 ), it is determined that the bonus lottery trigger has been won. When a negative determination is made in step S2501, the second addition processing is ended as it is.

When a positive determination is made in step S2501, the privilege point lottery process is executed in step S2502. In the privilege point lottery process, the privilege point lottery table corresponding to the current privilege lottery trigger role is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as privilege points, and the greater the value of the winning IV is, the more privilege points are 1 or more. Is set to have a higher probability of being selected, and a larger value of the winning IV is set to have a higher probability of selecting a larger privilege point. In the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the privilege point lottery table. To do.

In a succeeding step S2503, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. When a negative determination is made in step S2503, the second addition processing is finished as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point that has been won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

In a succeeding step S2505, a calculation process is executed for the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before stored in the register of the sub MPU 82 in step S2504 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value in the normal AT state (specifically, “7”).

In a succeeding step S2506, calculation processing is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value in the normal AT state (specifically, “7”).

After that, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2506 is smaller than the value of the remainder calculated by the calculation process of step S2505. In the configuration where the value of privilege points that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the reference value for addition, the value after the addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than the value before addition It means that the privilege points, which were larger than 7×(n−1) and smaller than 7×n, became 7×n or more by the addition of the counter (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that the number of times of setting in the normal AT state is added.

If a negative determination is made in step S2507, the setting process of the actual addition state ends as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2507, then in step S2508 the 1-bit addition state transition flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the second addition processing is terminated. The addition state transition flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the transition to the addition state should be performed after the end of the branch AT state.

Returning to the description of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), after the second addition process is executed in step S2407, the value of the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S2408. By the way, every time the value of the branch AT game counter is decremented by 1, in step S1109 to step S1111 in the cycle process (FIG. 28), the display control data table and the light emission control data for the battle effect set this time are set. The reference range of the table and the sound output control data table is switched to the reference range corresponding to the next game. With this, every time one game is consumed, the effect range of the battle effect is switched to the effect range corresponding to the next game.

Then, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the branch AT game counter after subtracting 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the processing for the branch AT state is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the processing for ending the branch AT state is executed in step S2410, and then the processing for the branch AT state is executed. The process ends.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the termination processing in the branch AT state.

First, in step S2601, whether or not the battle effect executed this time is a defeat effect is determined by determining whether or not the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". When the defeat effect flag is set to "1", it is determined in step S2602 whether the value of the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is less than 7, in step S2603, the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". In step S2603, the final chance flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "3". As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the final chance process of step S1815 is executed. Then, the termination process of the main branch AT state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the value of the privilege point counter is decremented by 7. In a succeeding step S2605, battle lottery processing is executed. The processing content of the battle lottery processing is the same as the processing content of step S2303 and the processing content of step S2311 in the branch AT state setting processing (FIG. 43).

In the following step S2606, the value corresponding to the battle lottery result in step S2605 is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub RAM 84, and the flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. In this case, if the winning effect is selected, the branch AT game counter is set to "3" so that the branch AT state is extended by 3 games, and if the draw effect is selected, the branch AT state is 1 game. The branch AT game counter is set to "1" so as to be extended.

That is, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more and the extended holiday game in the normal AT state is confirmed in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat production is selected as the battle production, the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. .. Then, in the branched AT state, the processing for AT is executed. As a result, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat production is selected, not only the condominium in the normal AT state is determined but also the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. This is advantageous to the player. Then, by utilizing this extended game, a revival effect that is changed from the defeat effect to the victory effect or the draw effect is executed, so that the degree of attention in the effect is increased.

Further, the number of continuous games extended in the branched AT state is larger when the winning effect is selected than when the draw effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage when the winning effect is selected, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the winning effect will occur.

Further, in step S2606, the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the revival flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". The revival flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that revival of the winning effect or the drawing effect has occurred in the situation where the defeat effect has been selected.

Then, in step S2607, a process for winning effect is executed. In the process for win effect, when the win effect is selected by the battle lottery process in the immediately preceding step S2605, the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 in the branch AT state setting process (FIG. 43) are executed. Specifically, when the winning effect is selected, the value of the winning counter of the sub RAM 84 is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter after adding 1 is "12". Then, when it is “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability. Then, the termination process of the main branch AT state is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the revival flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not the revival of the winning effect or the drawing effect has occurred. Further, in step S2609, it is determined whether or not the addition state transition flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", so that the privilege is obtained during the branch AT state in which the winning effect or the drawing effect is selected. It is determined whether or not the value of the point counter becomes 7 or more.

When a negative determination is made in both step S2608 and step S2609, the pre-branch AT state setting process is executed in step S2610, and then the main branch AT state ending process is terminated.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the AT state before branch.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the battle effect finally performed in the current branched AT state is a win effect. If it is a winning effect, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of winning effect is executed in step S2702. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of winning effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the number-of-consecutive-games lottery table at the time of winning presentation, the probability that 30 games are selected as one set of continuous games is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability of being done is 5/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the number-of-consecutive-games lottery table during the winning effect. Collate.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2701 that it is a draw effect, a continuous game number lottery process in the draw effect is executed in step S2703. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table for the draw effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the number-of-consecutive-games lottery table during the draw effect, the probability that 30 games will be selected as one set of continuous games is 3/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 5/10, and 100 games will be selected. The probability of being done is 2/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the continuous game number lottery table during the draw effect. Collate.

When the process of step S2702 or step S2703 is executed, the value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2702 or the lottery process of step S2703 is set to the normal AT game of the sub RAM 84 in step S2704. Set in the counter. After that, in step S2705, the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed. After that, the setting process of the pre-branching AT state is ended.

Returning to the description of the termination process of the branch AT state (FIG. 46 ), if a positive determination is made in step S2608 or step S2609, the processes of steps S2611 to S2614 are executed. In step S2611, "1" is set to the loading state of the sub RAM 84 and the branch AT state flag is cleared to "0". In a succeeding step S2612, "2" is set to the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84. By setting the execution target counter to "2", the additional state process in step S1814 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

Then, in step S2613, the lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed, and in step S2614, the process for setting the compensation replay number counter is executed, and then the ending process of the main branch AT state is ended. The processing contents of these steps S2613 and S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2106 and S2107 in the setting process of the added state (FIG. 40).

<Progress of branch AT state>
Next, with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 48, the manner of progress of the branched AT state will be described. FIG. 48(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a progress mode of the branched AT state, and FIGS. 48(B1) to 48(B6) are diagrams simply showing the content of the battle effect on the image display device 66.

If the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more when the pre-branching AT state (ST41) is finished (ST42), the winning effect (ST43) or the drawing effect (ST44) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is connected and the state returns to the pre-branching state (ST45). It should be noted that, before shifting to the pre-branching state (ST45), it is possible to shift to the addition state or the bonus AT state.

If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 when the pre-branching AT state (ST41) is finished (ST51), the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) is executed. As a result, if it is the AT continuous winning, the winning effect (ST53) or the drawing effect (ST54) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is connected and the state returns to the pre-branching state (ST45). It should be noted that, before shifting to the pre-branching state (ST45), it is possible to shift to the addition state or the bonus AT state. On the other hand, in the case where the continuation is lost in the AT continuous lottery process (ST52), the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect.

Here, the content of the battle effect will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 48(B1) to (B6).

In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48(B1), the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are displayed on the image display device 66. In addition, in the battle production, a moving image will be displayed in each game, but when the display content before switching specified in each game is reached, the display content before switching is started until the next game starts. The still image is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(B2), only the teammate character CH1 is displayed, and further, as shown in FIG. 48(B3), only the enemy character CH2 is displayed. After that, the state of the battle between both characters CH1 and CH2 is displayed as a moving image. Then, in the case of a winning effect, as shown in FIG. 48(B4), a state in which the teammate character CH1 wins over the enemy character CH2 is displayed, and in the case of a draw effect, as shown in FIG. 48(B5). , A state in which both the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are standing up is displayed, and in the case of the defeat effect, a state in which the ally character CH1 is defeated by the enemy character CH2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (B6). It

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 48(A), when the continuation failure occurs in the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) and the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect, the value of the privilege point counter is 7 at the end of the defeat effect. It is determined whether or not the above. If the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST61), a revival victory effect (ST62) or a revival draw effect (ST63) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is connected, and after the addition state is performed, the state returns to the pre-branching state (ST64). On the other hand, if the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST65), the state shifts to the final chance state (ST66).

With the above configuration, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the continuous AT state is confirmed, and even if the number of remaining sets is "0", continuous winning is performed in the AT continuous lottery process. As a result, the normal AT state is connected. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the normal AT state will be extended.

Further, even if the continuation failure occurs in the AT continuous lottery process, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the branched AT state, and the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes 1 or more. It will be a continuous holiday. As a result, even if the defeat effect occurs in the branched AT state, it is possible to maintain the expectation for continuing the normal AT state.

Further, even if the AT continuation lottery process is once discontinued, if the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more in the branch AT state and the normal AT state is connected, the subsequent branch AT state is started. If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7, the AT continuous lottery process is executed again. As a result, the opportunity to execute the AT continuous lottery process is secured before the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the normal AT state will continue.

<Promotion of AT continuation probability>
Next, the manner in which the AT continuation probability in the AT continuation lottery process is promoted will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 49.

As described above, six types of AT continuation probabilities are set: 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82% and 88%. When transitioning to the normal AT state via the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is 77%, 82%, or 88%. On the other hand, when directly transiting to the normal AT state without passing through the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is basically 50%.

In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation win, the battle lottery process results in a winning effect win, and the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process results in an promotion win, the AT continuation probability increases by one step. .. That is, 50% results in 60%, 60% results in 70%, 70% results in 77%, 77% results in 82%, and 82% results in 88%. As a result, the longer the normal AT state is connected, the higher the probability that the AT continuation probability is, and the normal AT state is more easily connected. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the normal AT state is continuous.

Further, when the winning effect occurs 12 times in the normal AT state without intervening the non-AT state, the AT continuation probability has the highest probability regardless of the probability of the AT continuation probability at that time. There is 88%. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a win effect in the battle effect, and the interest in the battle effect is improved by increasing the degree of attention to the battle effect.

Here, in the case where there are two opportunities, that is, the number of remaining sets and the AT continuous lottery process, as an opportunity for the normal AT state to play together, the normal AT state is triggered by the number of remaining sets being 1 or more. Even if the game continues, the battle lottery process may be executed and a winning effect may occur. When the winning effect is generated 12 times, the AT continuation probability of the AT continuous lottery process becomes the highest probability. As a result, when there are two opportunities, that is, the number of remaining sets and the AT continuous lottery process, as an opportunity for the normal AT state to play together, both opportunities are determined as to whether or not the AT continuous probability has the highest probability. It becomes possible to relate closely.

Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a stock notification unit 68 for notifying the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. In the stock notification unit 68, the display color is changed in accordance with the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state, so by checking the display color, the player grasps how many times the number of remaining sets is. It is possible to As a result, by checking the stock notification unit 68 and grasping the number of remaining sets, the player himself/herself can determine the degree of expectation at which the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect. Will be understood. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability.

The slot machine 10 is also provided with a winning number notification unit 69 for notifying the number of winning effects. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the number of winning effects by checking the winning number notification unit 69.

<Transition timing of addition state>
Next, the transition timing to the addition state in the pre-branching AT state and the branch AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

50(a) shows the execution period in the AT state before branch, FIG. 50(b) shows the execution period in the branch AT state, FIG. 50(c) shows the execution period in the add-on state, and FIG. Indicates the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7.

As shown in FIG. 50A, the pre-branching AT state is started at the timing of t1, and as a result of each game in the pre-branching AT state, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. The value of the counter is 7×n (n is an integer of 1 or more). As a result, the pre-branching AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50(a), and the addition state starts as shown in FIG. 50(c). In other words, in the pre-branching AT state, the bonus point counter shifts to the additional state at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more.

Then, at the timing of t3, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50(c), and the pre-branching AT state is restored as shown in FIG. 50(a). In this case, the pre-branching AT state is restored in the state of the number of continuous games remaining before the shift to the addition state.

Then, at the timing of t4, the pre-branching AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50(a), so that the branch AT state is started as shown in FIG. 50(b). Then, as a result of each game in the branched AT state, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7×(n+1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 50(d). However, at the timing of t5, the branch AT state does not end as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t6, the branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50(b), and the addition state is started as shown in FIG. 50(c). That is, in the branch AT state, the bonus point counter does not shift to the additional state at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, but shifts to the additional state when the branch AT state ends. This prevents the execution of battle production from becoming complicated.

Then, at the timing of t7, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50(c), and the pre-branching AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50(a).

<Processing for additional status>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51, the additional state process performed in step S1814 of the during-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described.

In step S2801, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push-order avoiding process will be described in detail later, but is for preventing the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal, even when the normal AT-state condominium does not occur. Processing.

In a succeeding step S2802, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2803. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed. After that, in step S2804, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the process for the additional state is finished.

When a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2805 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for main loading state is finished as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2806.

In step S2806, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery trigger combination has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14 ), it is determined that the bonus lottery trigger has been won.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2806, the additional lottery table corresponding to the current additional mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub-side ROM 83 in step S2807. In the addition lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3" are set as the number of additions. Further, as the additional mode, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52A, a first additional mode, a second additional mode, and a third additional mode are set, and are set when the additional state is entered. In the first addition mode that is performed, the addition probability is the lowest, and even when the addition occurs, a small number of additions is likely to be selected. In addition, in the second addition mode, which can be shifted from the first addition mode, the addition probability is higher than that in the first addition mode, and when the addition occurs, the number of additions that is larger than in the first addition mode is selected. It is easy to be affected. In addition, in the third addition mode, which can be shifted from the first addition mode or the second addition mode, the addition probability is higher than that in the second addition mode, and when additional addition occurs, the number of times is larger than that in the second addition mode. It is easy to select the number of additions. In addition, in relation to the winning combination, the higher the value of the winning IV is, the higher the probability of addition is set, and the larger the value of the winning IV is, the more the number of additions is increased. It is set to have a high probability of being selected.

In a succeeding step S2808, additional lottery processing is executed. In the additional lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the additional lottery table.

In a succeeding step S2809, it is determined whether or not the result of the add-on lottery process is an add-on win. If it is a winning addition, 7×n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter in step S2810. In this case, n is the number of additions of 1 or more selected in the addition lottery process.

Here, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 52B, the privilege point counter has a data amount of 1 byte. The privilege point counter is a counter to which a value less than the privilege reference numerical value (specifically, “7”) is added when the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. Is. In addition, the bonus reference value is added to the bonus point counter when the bonus AT state is set and the remaining set number is added once, and in the additional state, the additional lottery process is performed to obtain the additional winning and the remaining set number is n times (n. Is an integer greater than or equal to 1), the value of privilege standard numerical value xn (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) is added. That is, the privilege point counter is used not only as a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the privilege reference numerical value, but also as a counter for adding a value when the remaining set number is added. This makes it possible to reduce the number of counters as compared with a configuration in which a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the privilege reference numerical value and a counter for measuring the number of remaining sets are separately provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in a configuration that handles data in byte units.

In addition, the value less than the privilege reference value is cumulatively added to the privilege point counter and the value of the privilege reference value xn (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added, and the number of remaining sets is 1 or more. In such a situation, when the normal AT-state condominium is generated, the privilege reference numerical value is subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, it becomes possible for the privilege point counter to centrally handle the numerical values related to the addition of the number of remaining sets. Therefore, for example, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a remaining set number counter are separately provided and the addition process of the remaining set number counter is executed according to the value of the privilege point counter. Planned.

Returning to the description of the additional state process (FIG. 51 ), if a negative determination is made in step S2809 or the process of step S2810 is executed, the mode UP lottery process is executed in step S2811. In the mode UP lottery process, the mode UP lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub-side ROM 83. For example, in the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode, an UP winning result for the second addition mode, an UP winning result for the third addition mode, and a deviation result are set, and the second addition mode is set. In the mode UP lottery table in, the UP winning result and the defeat result for the third addition mode are set. In addition, in the mode UP lottery table in the third addition mode, the current state maintenance winning result as the mode UP winning and the current state maintaining loss result as the deviating result are set. Further, the mode UP lottery tables in the first addition mode and the second addition mode are set so that the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the mode UP probability. In the mode UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the mode UP lottery table. To do.

In a succeeding step S2812, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode UP lottery process is the mode UP winning. If it is not the mode UP win, the process for the actual addition state is ended as it is, and if it is the mode UP win, the process proceeds to step S2813. In step S2813, a process for changing the addition mode to the one-step or two-step mode is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52A, when the first addition mode is selected, the second addition mode or the third addition mode is changed, and when the second addition mode is selected, the third addition mode is changed. When the third addition mode is set, the third addition mode is maintained.

Then, in step S2814, a lottery process for the number of compensation replays is executed. As described above, in the addition state, it is easy to increase the number of times the normal AT state is set, but the addition state ends when the normal replay winning occurs in the number of compensation replays. The compensation replay count lottery process is a process for determining the compensation replay count by lottery, which triggers the end of the additional state.

In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table corresponding to the current addition mode is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. , The value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table in the first addition mode, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, and “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10 and 3/10 “2” is selected with a probability and “3” is selected with a probability of 1/10. In the compensation replay lottery table in the second addition mode, “1” is selected with a probability of 3/10, “2” is selected with a probability of 5/10, and “3” is selected with a probability of 2/10. It In the compensation replay lottery table in the third addition mode, “1” is selected with a probability of 1/10, “2” is selected with a probability of 3/10, and “3” is selected with a probability of 6/10. It That is, the second addition mode has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, and also has a larger number of selections of compensation replays. Further, the third addition mode has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, and also has a large number of selections of compensation replays.

After executing the lottery process for the number of compensation replays in step S2814, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is added to the compensation replay number counter of the sub RAM 84 in step S2815. After that, the setting process of the additional state is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the normal replay combination is won. When the normal replay combination is not won, the process for the actual addition state is ended as it is, and when the normal replay combination is won, the process proceeds to step S2817.

In step S2817, the value of the compensation replay number counter of the sub RAM 84 is decremented by 1, and in the following step S2818, it is determined whether or not the value of the compensation replay number counter after decrementing by 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the process for the book loading state is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S2819.

In step S2819, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter of the sub RAM 84 is "0" to determine whether or not the current addition state has transitioned in the middle of the pre-branching AT state. To judge. If the value of the normal AT game counter is “0”, it means that the addition state this time has transitioned to the end of the branch AT state. After the setting process of the AT state before branch is executed in S2820, the process for the additional state is ended. The processing content of the pre-branching AT state setting processing is the same as the processing content shown in the flowchart of FIG. However, in step S2705, instead of clearing the branch AT status flag to "0", the addition status flag is cleared to "0".

If the value of the normal AT game counter is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S2819, and the flow proceeds to step S2821. In step S 2821, the addition state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and then the process for the addition state is ended. As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed.

<Process for final chance>
Next, the final chance process executed in step S1815 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2901, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push-order avoiding process will be described in detail later, but is for preventing the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal, even when the normal AT-state condominium does not occur. Processing.

In a succeeding step S2902, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT start command is received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, in step S2903, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to "4", and the sub AT The final chance flag of the side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing of step S1816 is executed. After that, in step S2904, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84, the process for the final chance ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2905 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for the actual addition state is ended as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2906.

In step S2906, the revival lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of this game and the current value of the privilege point counter is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the higher the value of the winning IV is, the higher the resurrection winning probability is, and the higher the value of the current privilege point counter is, the higher the resurrection winning probability is set. Has been done.

In a succeeding step S2907, a restoration lottery process is executed. In the revival lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the revival lottery table.

In a succeeding step S2908, it is determined whether or not the result of the recovery lottery process is a recovery win. If it is a revival win, in step S2909, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of revival is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-consecutive-games lottery table at the time of restoration is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the time of revival, the probability that 30 games will be selected as one set of continuous games is 4/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 3/10, and 100 games will be selected. The probability is 3/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the number-of-consecutive-games lottery table at the time of restoration. Collate. Then, in step S2910, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2909 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub RAM 84.

After that, in step S2911, the final chance flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed. Furthermore, in step S2911, the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. Then, the process for the final chance is finished.

By clearing the bonus point counter to "0" when the bonus is restored in the revival lottery process, the value of the bonus point counter that contributed to the revival winning is further used in the normal AT state of the subsequent condominium destination. Is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to limit the generation of profit by the privilege points.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S2908, the operation proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not an extension trigger combination has been won. When the winning is achieved by any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the winning combination is won. When the extension trigger has not been won, various clearing processes are executed in step S2913. In various clearing processes, the final chance flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the normal AT state ends. Also, the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the privilege point counter is inherited between the sets when the normal AT state is continuous, while the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes “0” and the state shifts to the non-AT state. It cannot be taken over. Also, the victory counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the victory counter is inherited between sets when the normal AT state is continuous, while it is inherited when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes “0” and shifts to the non-AT state. I can't.

Then, after the ceiling game number lottery process is executed in step S2914, the final chance process is ended. In the ceiling game number lottery process, the ceiling game lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and further, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. The value of is compared with the ceiling game lottery table. Then, the value selected in the lottery process for the number of ceiling games is set in the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

If it is determined in step S2912 that the winning combination for an extension has been won, the processing for the final chance is ended as it is. As a result, the final chance state continues. In other words, even if you win the extension opportunity role in the final chance state, but do not get a recovery win in the resurrection lottery process, the final chance state continues as a benefit of winning the extension opportunity role. Become. If you win the extension trigger in the final chance state, the resurrection lottery process will be executed in a mode that is likely to be a resurrection win, but it was not a resurrection win despite winning the extension trigger. In that case, the player may be discouraged. On the other hand, if you are elected as an extension trigger, the final chance state will be extended, so you can suppress the disappointment when you are not revived even though you have been elected as an extension trigger. It will be possible.

<Process for bonus AT>
Next, the bonus AT process executed in step S1816 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, a push order avoidance process is executed. The push-order avoiding process will be described in detail later, but is for preventing the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal, even when the normal AT-state condominium does not occur. Processing.

In a succeeding step S3002, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT end command indicating that the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is “0” is received from the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 transmits a bonus AT end command when one set of bonus AT states has ended even in a situation where the bonus AT number counter is not “0”. In this case, step S3002 Does not make an affirmative judgment.

When a negative determination is made in step S3002, this bonus AT processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3002, the operation proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

In a succeeding step S3004, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the loading state flag of the sub RAM 84. If the addition state flag is set to "1", it means that the series of bonus AT states that have ended this time have been transitioned in the middle of the addition state. Therefore, in step S3005, the execution target counter After setting the value to "2", the processing for the bonus AT is finished. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the additional state processing of step S1814 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3004, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the branch AT state flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". If the branch AT state flag is set to “1”, it means that the series of bonus AT states that have ended this time have been transitioned in the middle of the branch AT state. After setting the value of the counter to "1", this bonus AT processing is ended. As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the branch AT state process of step S1813 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not the normal AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". If the normal AT flag is set to "1", it means that the series of bonus AT states that have ended this time have been transitioned in the middle of the AT state before branching. After clearing the value of the counter to “0”, this bonus AT processing is ended. As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3008, it is determined in step S3010 whether the penalty AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S3010, "1" is set to the normal AT flag of the sub RAM 84 in step S3011. In a succeeding step S3012, a continuous game number lottery process after the bonus is executed.

In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table after the bonus is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table after the bonus, the probability that 30 games will be selected as one set of continuous games is 1/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 2/10, and 100 games will be selected. The probability is 7/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is compared with the number-of-consecutive-games lottery table after the bonus. Collate.

When the process of step S3012 has been executed, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S3012 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub RAM 84 in step S3013. After that, in step S3014, the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then the present bonus AT process is ended. As a result, in the next AT process (FIG. 37), the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed.

On the other hand, if the penalty AT flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S3010, and this bonus AT processing is terminated. As a result, even if the bonus AT state is entered in the penalty situation, the normal AT state is not entered after the bonus AT state ends.

<About external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC>
Next, the configuration of the external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of the game hall in which a large number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 55(b) is an external terminal board 90 provided in the slot machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of slot machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. Further, in the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with each slot machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10, and has a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times the game has been executed and a second display for displaying the number of times the game has been executed in a predetermined game state. A section DC2 and a third display section DC3 for displaying the number of times of execution of a specific game state different from the predetermined game state are provided.

A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as a management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 temporarily stores various data such as a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and various data and information input from the slot machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. RAM 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through the electric wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10 is executed, and a signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55(b).

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the external terminal board 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC to the outside are different.

Specifically, in order to output the information indicating the number of medals awarded in each game, and the external terminal 90a for the insertion signal used for outputting the information indicating the number of bets in the game for each game. The external terminal 90b for the giving signal used for, the external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal used for outputting the information indicating that the first gaming state has started, and the second gaming state is started. External terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal used to output the information indicating that, and for the third gaming state signal used to output the information indicating that the third gaming state has started The external terminal 90e, the external terminal 90f for an abnormal signal used to output information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected a fraudulent occurrence such as a charging abnormality or a payout abnormality, and a setting change operation is being executed. The external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal used to output the information indicating that, and the external terminal 90h for the opening signal used to output the information indicating that the front door 12 is open. include.

Out of these, the number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets is output from the external signal input terminal 90a. For example, when the prescribed number of bet numbers is "2", the pulse signal is output twice so that the ON time and the OFF time are 50 msec each at the start of one game, and the prescribed number of bet numbers is " In the case of “3”, the pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are 50 msec each at the start of one game. The hall computer HC determines that one game has started by receiving the pulse signal of one group from the external terminal 90a for the input signal, and displays the number of times the game has been executed on the first display portion DC1 of the data counter DC. Is incremented by 1.

The number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of paid-out sheets is output from the external terminal 90b for the giving signal. For example, when 9 medals are awarded, a pulse signal is output 9 times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game, and when 4 medals are awarded. At the end of one game, the pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time are 50 msec each.

The external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is used in the slot machine 10 so that the hall computer HC can recognize the number of executions of the normal AT state. Hereinafter, the first gaming state signal will be referred to as an AT1 signal, and the external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal will be referred to as an external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the normal AT state is newly started by confirming the rise of the signal from the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal, and executes the normal AT state on the second display portion DC2 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the display of the number of times.

The external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal is used to allow the hall computer HC to recognize the number of times the bonus AT state is executed in the slot machine 10. Hereinafter, the second gaming state signal will be referred to as an AT2 signal, and the external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal will be referred to as an external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the bonus AT state is newly started by confirming the rise of the signal from the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal, and executes the bonus AT state on the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the display of the number of times.

The external terminal 90e for the third gaming state signal is used in the slot machine 10 so that the hall computer HC can recognize the number of times the CB state is executed. From the external terminal 90f for the abnormal signal, the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal, and the external terminal 90h for the open signal, the ON state is maintained while the respective target events occur.

The external signal 90g for the setting operation signal may output the ON signal not only during the operation for changing the setting but also during the operation for confirming the current setting value. Further, both the abnormality signal and the setting operation signal may be output from one external terminal.

The main side MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in a one-to-one correspondence with each other through the electric wiring group EL3, and a predetermined voltage is applied to the external terminals 90a to 90h according to the processing result. Output a signal.

<Process for external output executed by main MPU 72>
Next, the external output process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. However, in the following description, a process for external output through the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal and the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal in the external terminal board 90 will be described.

First, the external output setting process at the end will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The external output setting process at the end is executed in step S216 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S3101, it is determined whether the internal post-CB state or the in-CB state. If it is not in the CB internal post-state or in the CB mid-state, that is, in the CB non-internal state, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3102, and the output state of the AT2 signal is set in step S3103. After setting to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the time of this end is ended.

That is, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are not set to the ON state in the CB non-internal state, but may be set to the ON state in the CB internal post state or the CB in-progress state. Thus, in the hall computer HC, by confirming that the AT1 signal or the AT2 signal is in the ON state, it is possible not only to confirm whether the state is the normal AT state or the bonus AT state, but also the CB. It is possible to confirm that it is in the internal post-state or the CB in-progress state. In this case, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with the internal state notifying unit 63 for notifying that the CB winning flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag is set to "1". Is set, the internal state notifying unit 63 is turned on without waiting for the end of the game. On the other hand, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are set to the ON state after the end of the game in which the CB winning flag is set to "1". As a result, the slot machine 10 informs that the CB internal post-state or the CB mid-state is the CB internal post-state or the CB mid-state at a timing before the external output to the hall computer HC. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which only the game hall manager knows that the CB is in the post-CB state or the CB-in-progress state, and cannot be grasped by the player.

If the state is the post-CB internal state or the CB-in-progress state and a positive determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more. The bell prize counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times that the first bell prize or the second bell prize has occurred without the pushing order being out of order when the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won. Is.

<Relationship between Bell winning and AT1 signal output status>
Here, the bell winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bell winning determination process is executed in step S607 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

In the bell winning determination process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether the AT2 signal is in the ON state. When a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won in this game. If neither the first bell role nor the second bell role has been won, the present bell winning determination process is ended as it is, and if the first bell role or the second bell role has been won, the process proceeds to step S3203. ..

In step S3203, it is determined whether or not it has been confirmed that the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred as a result of the logical operation processing of the symbol combination of step S604 in the winning determination processing (FIG. 18). If the first bell prize or the second bell prize has occurred, the value of the bell prize counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 and the bell off flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0" in step S3204. After clearing, the present bell winning determination process is ended. If neither the first bell prize nor the second bell prize has occurred, in step S3205, the bell off flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the bell prize counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1." After "0" is cleared, the present bell winning determination process is ended. The off-bell flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that neither the first bell prize nor the second bell prize has occurred in the situation where the first bell or the second bell is won.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3201 that the AT2 signal is in the ON state, the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3206. After that, the present bell winning determination process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is 3 or more, in step S3105, the AT1 signal Set the output state to ON.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104, or if the processing of step S3105 is executed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not "1" is set in the bell off flag of the main RAM 74. If the bell-off flag is set to "1", the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3107, and the bell-off flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in the following step S3108. ..

With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 58, the manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination will be described.

58(a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 58(b) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 58(c) shows the execution of the game winning the first bell role or the second bell role. 58(d) shows the occurrence state of the first bell winning or the second bell winning, and FIG. 58(e) shows the execution period of other games.

At a timing of t1 and a timing of t2 which are neither normal AT state nor bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the game winning the first bell role or the second bell role is started. .. However, since it is not in the AT state, the notification control of the pushing order for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the bell winning does not occur.

Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58A, the sub-side MPU 82 is set to shift to the normal AT state, so that the normal AT state is started. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58(e), a new game is started, but since this game is not a game winning the first bell role or the second bell role, whichever bell No winnings will occur. However, at the timing of t3, the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state as shown in FIG. 58(b).

After that, as shown in FIG. 58C, the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started at each of the timings t4 and t6 in the normal AT state. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes push order notification control for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58D, a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated at each of the timing of t5 and the timing of t7. However, at this timing, the value of the bell winning counter is "2", which is not 3 or more, so the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state as shown in FIG. 58(b).

Thereafter, at a timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 58(e), after a game in which neither the first bell role nor the second bell role is won is started, at a timing of t9 which is after the end of the game. As shown in FIG. 58C, the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes push order notification control for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. Therefore, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 58(d), a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated. As a result, when the value of the bell winning counter becomes 3 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on as shown in FIG. 58(b) at the timing of t10.

After that, at timings t11 and t12, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started, and the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination is generated. To do. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the final game in the normal AT state ends, so that as shown in FIG. 58(a), the end setting of the normal AT state is set in the sub-side MPU 82. Done. However, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58B, the AT1 signal remains in the ON state.

Then, at timing t14, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, the game winning the first bell role or the second bell role is started. In this case, since it is not in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not execute the notification control of the pushing order for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination. Further, in order to generate the first bell winning or the second bell winning, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, whereas in either the normal AT state or the bonus AT state. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop without any situation, a penalty event will be generated. Then, there is a high possibility that the bell winning will not occur in the game started at the timing of t14. Then, since the corresponding bell winning does not occur even if the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, "1" is set to the off-bell flag of the main RAM 74 at the timing of t15, and the AT1 signal is output. Is turned off.

By allowing the sub-side MPU 82 to independently perform the transition setting to the normal AT state and the end setting, the processing load on the main-side MPU 72 can be reduced. In addition, the communication between the main-side MPU 72 and the sub-side MPU 82 is one-way communication from the main-side MPU 72 to the sub-side MPU 82, so that the chance of inputting an unauthorized signal to the main-side MPU 72 is reduced. Further, by having a configuration in which the main MPU 72 outputs externally to the hall computer HC, the external output can be directly controlled in the main MPU 72 that controls the progress of the game.

In this case, the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal AT state when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times (specifically, three times) without intervening the push order out of order in winning the bell role. Then, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. With such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the transition to the normal AT state, and externally outputs the signal indicating the normal AT state. It becomes possible to do.

The main MPU 72 determines that the normal AT state has ended and sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state when the push sequence is out of order when the bell is won. With such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the end of the normal AT state and outputs the signal indicating the normal AT state to the external output. It is possible to finish.

The trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state are both points whether or not a bell winning has occurred at the time of bell winning. As a result, the monitoring process for setting the ON state of the AT1 signal and the monitoring process for setting the OFF state of the AT1 signal can be made common, and the processing load can be reduced.

The number of occurrences of bell prizes at the time of bell winning when the AT1 signal is set to the ON state is set to be larger than the number of times of bell non-winnings at the time of bell winning required when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. .. As a result, regarding the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, priority is given to setting the ON state under the actual normal AT state, rather than performing the setting process earlier, and regarding the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state. It is possible to give priority to performing the setting process to the OFF state earlier than the setting to the OFF state when the normal AT state is actually finished. Therefore, the AT1 signal can be set to the ON state carefully, while the AT1 signal can be set to the OFF state early.

When setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state, not only the first bell prize but also the second bell prize is monitored. This makes it possible to increase the trigger for setting to the ON state and the trigger for setting to the OFF state.

In the bonus AT state, the bell winning counter is not incremented even if a bell winning occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state during the bonus AT state.

It is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop for both the first bell winning and the second bell winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state in the situation where the AT is not in the non-AT state.

<Relationship between normal replay role and AT1 signal output state>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56 ), if a negative determination is made in step S3106 or the process of step S3108 is executed, it is provided in the main side RAM 74 in step S3109. It is determined whether or not the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 2 or more. The push-order correct answer counter is for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped in the push order determined by lottery in the main MPU 72 when a normal replay combination is won. It is a counter. The pushing order lottery process when the normal replay combination is won is executed in step S405 in the winning data acquisition process (FIG. 16), as described above.

Here, the normal replay pressing order determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The normal replay pressing order determination process is executed in step S608 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

In the normal replay pressing order determination process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in the current game. As already described, when the normal replay combination is won, the operation in relation to the stop operation sequence of each stop button 42 to 44 and the rotation position of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R of each stop button 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, a replay prize usually occurs.

When the normal replay winning is not generated, the normal replay pressing order determination process is ended as it is, and when the normal replay winning is generated, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, the result of the push-order lottery process (step S405) executed at the start of the current game is read from the main RAM 74. In a succeeding step S3303, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game is read. Then, in step S3304, it is determined whether the result read in step S3302 and the result read in step S3303 match. That is, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in an order corresponding to the result of the push-order lottery process.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3304, then in step S3305 the value of the push-order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1, and then this normal replay push-order decision processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push-order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0" in step S3306. After clearing, the normal replay pressing order determination process is ended. The set flag specifies in the main MPU 72 whether or not the processing corresponding to the value of the push-order correct answer counter being 2 or more has already been executed in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state. It is a flag for.

Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56 ), if it is determined in step S3109 that the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on in step S3110. In step S3111, it is determined whether or not the value of the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is "1".

If a positive determination is made in step S3110 and a negative determination is made in step S3111, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3112. In the following step S3113, the wait time (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, a negative determination is made in step S218 of the normal processing (FIG. 11), and a wait time corresponding to the extended game wait time is generated at the end of the current game. Further, in step S3113, "1" is set to the set flag of the main RAM 74. After that, in step S3114, the extended game wait command is set to be transmitted to the sub MPU 82. As a result, in the sub-side MPU 82, as described above, in the step S1210 of the standby effect setting process (FIG. 29), the flag for the condominium unit weight is set to "1", and the stationary state corresponding to the consolation unit wait time is set. The image is displayed on the image display device 66.

When the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when the value of the push-order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more as described above, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. The setting process is executed by the external output setting process at the start in step S210 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the external output setting process at the start.

In step S3401, it is determined whether the internal post-CB state or the in-CB state. If the state is not the post-CB internal state or the CB in-progress state, that is, if it is the CB non-internal state, the external output setting process at the time of this start is ended as it is.

If the CB internal post-state or the CB mid-state, it is determined in step S3402 whether the value of the push-order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is 2 or more. If it is 2 or more, in step S3403, it is determined whether the AT2 signal is in the ON state. If the AT2 signal is not ON, the AT1 signal is set to ON in step S3404.

As described above, in the case where the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the AT2 signal is in the OFF state, and the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is output at the end of the game in which the value is 2 or more. Is set to the OFF state and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state again at the start of the next game which is started after the continuous game wait time (1 sec) has elapsed. Such setting processing of the AT1 signal is executed in order to grasp the number of execution sets of the normal AT state in the hall computer HC when the normal AT state is continuous. However, since it is impossible for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the normal AT state is in continuous operation, the OFF/ON setting of the AT1 signal is performed at the timing when the normal AT state in continuous operation occurs. As described above, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the normal replay processing and the push order avoidance processing. These normal replay processing and push order avoidance processing will be described below.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal replay processing in the sub MPU 82. The normal replay process is executed in step S1901 of the pre-branching AT state process (FIG. 38).

In the normal replay processing, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to the normal replay combination winning. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is included, in step S3503, by grasping the contents of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command, the push order lottery in the main MPU 72 is performed. The pushing order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written in the sub RAM 84.

In a succeeding step S3504, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the post-compartment-resort flag provided in the sub RAM 84. The flag after the condominium is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the normal AT state has concatenated. When the victory flag or the draw effect is executed in the branch AT state to return to the pre-branch AT state, the timing at which the flag after the condominium is set to “1” is the end of the addition state that has been transitioned after the end of the branch AT state. In the pre-branch AT state, and in the final chance state, the revival lottery process (step S2907) results in a revival winning and returns to the pre-branch AT state.

When the flag after the condominium is set to "1", in step S3505, the push order data written in the sub RAM 84 in step S3503 is set as push order data to be notified on the image display device 66. As a result, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order selected in the pushing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pressing order, the normal replay prize is generated.

If "1" has not been set in the after-game flag, it is determined in step S3506 whether or not the value of the push-order correct answer counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. The push order correct answer counter indicates the number of times each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated in the mode selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay combination is won. It is a counter for specifying in.

When the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3507, the push-order data different from the push-order data written in the sub RAM 84 in step S3503 is used as push-order data for informing the image display device 66. Set. As a result, a pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pushing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pressing order, the normal replay prize is generated.

If a negative decision is made in step S3501, a negative decision is made in step S3502, a negative decision is made in step S3506, the process of step S3505 is executed, or the process of step S3507 is executed, In step S3508, it is determined whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the normal replay processing is terminated, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3509, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in this game. When the normal replay winning is not generated, the processing for the normal replay is ended as it is, and when the normal replay winning is generated, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not the pushing order data stored in the sub RAM 84 and the actual pushing order in the current game match.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3510, the value of the push-order correct answer counter of the sub RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S3511. In a succeeding step S3512, it is determined whether or not the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 2 or more. If it is not 2 or more, the normal replay processing is ended as it is, and if it is 2 or more, the flag after the condominium unit of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" in step S3513, and then the normal operation is performed. The replay processing ends. If a negative decision is made in step S3510, then in step S3514, the push-order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then this normal replay processing is ended.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the processing for avoiding the pushing order in the sub MPU 82. The push order avoidance process is step S2401 of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), step S2801 of the additional state process (FIG. 51), step S2901 of the final chance process (FIG. 53), and bonus AT process ( This is executed in step S3001 of FIG.

In the pressing order avoidance process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination is included, in step S3603, by grasping the contents of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command, the push order lottery in the main MPU 72 is performed. The pushing order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written in the sub RAM 84.

In a succeeding step S3604, it is determined whether the value of the push-order correct answer counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3605, the push-order data different from the push-order data written in the sub RAM 84 in step S3603 is used as push-order data for informing the image display device 66. Set. As a result, a pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pushing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped according to the pressing order, the normal replay prize is generated.

If a negative decision is made in step S3601, a negative decision is made in step S3602, a negative decision is made in step S3604, or the process of step S3605 is executed, then in step S3606 the main MPU 72 is decided. It is determined whether or not the winning result command is received from. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for avoiding the main pressing order is directly terminated, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3607.

In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a normal replay prize has occurred in this game. When the normal replay winning is not generated, the normal replay processing is ended as it is, and when the normal replay winning is generated, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub RAM 84 and the actual pressing order in the current game match.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3608, the value of the push-order correct answer counter of the sub RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S3609. Then, this normal replay processing is ended. If a negative decision is made in step S3608, then in step S3610 the push-order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then this normal replay processing is ended.

By executing the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process as described above, in the pre-branch AT state after the condominium in the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 is determined in the game in which the normal replay combination is won. The image display device 66 notifies the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the notification of the pressing order, the pressing order becomes correct, so that the main side MPU 72 once sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state and then sets it to the ON state again. To be done.

On the other hand, in a situation where the game is not in the pre-branching AT state after the game in the normal AT state, there is a pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined by the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay combination is won. The image is displayed on the image display device 66. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the notification of the pushing order, the pushing order will not be the correct answer in the situation where the AT is not in the pre-branching AT state after the condominium in the normal AT state. The process of once setting the signal to the OFF state and then setting it to the ON state again is not executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the main MPU 72 temporarily sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state and then sets it to the ON state when the correct pressing order occurs more than once, before branching after the condominium in the normal AT state. In a situation other than the AT state, the notification control of a pushing order different from the correct pushing order is executed on condition that the correct pushing order occurs at least once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the push order notification is performed when the normal replay combination is won, and it is possible to prevent the push order notification from continuing to be meaninglessly executed in the AT state. ..

A state in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay combination will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 63(a) shows the execution period of the AT state before branch, FIG. 63(b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 63(c) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 63(e) shows the execution period of the normal replay combination winning game, FIG. 63(e) shows the execution period of the other games, FIG. 63(f) shows the execution period of the correct push order notification, and FIG. 63(h) shows the setting status of the pressing order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 63(i) shows the setting status of the condominium unit wait time.

As shown in FIG. 63(d), the game that wins the normal replay combination is started at each of the timings t1 and t2 in the AT-before-branch state as shown in FIG. 63(a). In this case, since it is not after the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further set as shown in FIG. 63(h). Since it is "0", the false pressing order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63(g). However, in the game started at the timing of t2, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is accidentally correct, and as shown in FIG. 63(h) at the timing of t3 which is the ending timing of the game. The value of the push-order correct answer counter is “1”. Further, at the timing of t3, the pre-branching AT state ends as shown in FIG. 63(a), and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 63(b).

After that, at a timing of t4 in the situation of being in the branched AT state, a game different from the normal replay winning combination is executed as shown in FIG. 63(e), and at a timing of t5 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(d). The game that won the normal replay role is started. In this case, since the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 63(h), the incorrect push-order notification is executed at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 63(g). To be done. As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an incorrect answer pressing order, and at the timing of t6 which is the ending timing of the game, the pressing order correct answer counter is “0” as shown in FIG. 63(h). Cleared.

After that, at the timing of t7 in the situation of being in the branched AT state, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the game winning the normal replay combination is started. In this case, since it is not after the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further set as shown in FIG. 63(h). Since it is "0", the false pressing order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63(g). Therefore, in the game started at the timing of t7, the pushing order is incorrect.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the other game is ended as shown in FIG. 63(e), so that the branch AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 63(b) and also shown in FIG. 63(a). Thus, the AT state before branch is started.

Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the game winning the normal replay combination is started. In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the condominium in the normal AT state, the correct push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63(f). As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct answer pressing order in the game, and the value of the push order correct answer counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63(h) at the timing of t10 which is the ending timing of the game. To be done.

After that, at timing t11, other games are executed as shown in FIG. 63(e), and then at t12, the game won as the normal replay combination is started as shown in FIG. 63(d). .. In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the condominium in the normal AT state, the correct push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63(f). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct answer pressing order, and the value of the push order correct answer counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63(h) at the timing of t13. As a result, the value of the push-order correct answer counter becomes “2”, so that the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 63(c), and the continuous game wait time as shown in FIG. 63(i). The measurement of is started. Then, at the timing of t14, the continuous villa wait time elapses. Thereafter, at timing t15, another game is started as shown in FIG. 63(e), and accordingly, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 63(c).

Thereafter, at a timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the game winning the normal replay combination is started. In this case, since it is not after the normal AT state, the correct answer push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further set as shown in FIG. 63(h). Since it is "2", the incorrect pressing sequence information is executed as shown in FIG. 63(g). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an incorrect answer pressing order, and at the timing t17, which is the ending timing of the game, the pressing order correct answer counter is “0” as shown in FIG. 63(h). Cleared.

As described above, when the normal AT state is continuous, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the execution of the correct-pressing order notification so as to prompt the pressing-order correct answer at the time of winning the normal replay combination. Even if the main MPU 72 does not directly recognize that the normal AT state has been set, the main MPU 72 has the normal AT state through the occurrence of the correct correct order of push order when winning the normal replay role. It is possible to indirectly grasp the occurrence of the condominium. As a result, in the main MPU 72, the AT1 signal can be once turned OFF and then turned ON again in accordance with the normal AT state.

In the sub-side MPU 82, when the normal replay combination is won in a situation that does not correspond to the normal AT state, it is possible that the normal AT state is not the state in which the normal AT state is not operated because the execution control of the incorrect pressing order notification is intentionally performed. Despite this, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correct push order will occur multiple times when a normal replay role is won. This facilitates the control of turning the AT1 signal off once and then turning it on again in synchronization with the normal AT state.

When the AT1 signal is once turned off and then turned on again in the normal AT state, the OFF state is set before the continuous holiday wait time is measured, and the ON state is set. After the measurement of. By setting the extended game wait time in this way, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It is possible to secure the period for recognizing that the AT1 signal is in the OFF state in the hall computer HC.

The value of the push-order correct answer counter may be cleared to "0" when the value of the push-order correct answer counter is 2 or more and the AT1 signal is turned ON and then turned ON.

<Relationship between bonus AT state and output states of AT1 signal and AT2 signal>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56 ), when a negative determination is made in step S3109, a negative determination is made in step S3110, an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, or in step S3114. If the process has been executed, the process advances to step S3115. In step S3115, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is being executed by determining whether or not the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If the bonus AT state flag is set to "1", the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3116.

When a negative determination is made in step S3115 or when the processing of step S3116 is executed, it is determined in step S3117 whether or not "1" is set in the wait generation flag of the main RAM 74. , CB It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out of the internal state. If the wait generation flag is set to "1", the AT2 signal is set to the ON state and the wait generation flag is cleared to "0" in step S3118.

If a negative determination is made in step S3117, or if the process of step S3118 is executed, it is determined in step S3119 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". Then, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one set of the bonus AT state ends. If the value of the bonus AT counter is not "0", the external output setting process at the end of this time is ended as it is, and if the value of the bonus AT counter is "0", AT2 is set in step S3120. After setting the signal to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the end of this time is ended.

Next, in the external output setting process at the start (FIG. 60), the contents of the process executed in relation to the bonus AT state and the output states of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal will be described.

If a negative determination is made in step S3402, an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, or if the process of step S3404 is executed, in step S3405, the bonus AT end flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". By determining whether or not it is set, it is determined whether or not one set in the bonus AT state is completed and the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is “0”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3405, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3406.

If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the processing of step S3406 is executed, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. , It is determined whether or not a new set in the bonus AT state is started. When a negative determination is made in step S3407, the external output setting process at the start of the process is terminated as it is, and when a positive determination is made in step S3407, after the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3408, The external output setting process at the start of this process ends.

Next, the external output setting process before the start will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S3701, it is determined whether the internal post-CB state or the in-CB state. If it is not the CB internal post-state or the CB mid-state, that is, if it is the CB non-internal state, the external output setting process before this start is ended as it is.

If it is in the CB internal post-state or the CB mid-state, it is determined in step S3702 whether the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The situation in which the pre-start wait flag is set to "1" is, as described above, when the first special replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state. In addition, in the CB internal rear state and the AT1 signal is ON, the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. This is the case when it is operated. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the external output setting process before this start is ended as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state. After that, in step S3704, after the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the external output setting process before the main start is ended.

Next, the output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

65(a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 65(b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 65(c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 65(d) shows the bonus. 65(e) shows the execution period of the AT state, FIG. 65(e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 65(f) shows the execution period of the other game, and FIG. Indicates the setting status of the wait period.

As shown in FIG. 65(e), the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t1 which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, and the game is started at the timing of t2. finish. In this case, the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 65(d).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(f), another game is started at the timing of t3 which is the timing immediately after the bonus AT state is started. ), the wait period (8 sec) is set. This wait period elapses at the timing of t4, and at the timing of t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65(b).

Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 65(f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65(g), the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 65(d), and further, in FIG. 65(b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t7, the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65(g), and the current game is ended as shown in FIG. 65(f).

Thereafter, at a timing of t8, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65(f), but in this case, the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is 1 or more. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the bonus AT state is set again as shown in FIG. 65(d), and the AT2 signal is set to ON state again as shown in FIG. 65(b).

Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 65(f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t10, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65(g), the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 65(d), and further shown in FIG. 65(b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t11, the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65(g), so that the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65(f). In this case, since the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is “0”, as shown in FIG. 65(f), at the timing of t12, which is the timing of starting a new game, as shown in FIG. 65(c). As shown, the normal AT state is started, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG.

Even when the bonus AT state is continuous as described above, when the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state each time one set of the bonus AT state ends, and a new set of the bonus AT state is started. The AT2 signal is set to the ON state again. In addition, even when the bonus AT state continues in this way, a wait period occurs. By setting the wait period in this way, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It is possible to secure a period in which the computer HC recognizes that the AT2 signal is in the OFF state. In addition, during the wait period, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the continuous bonus AT state on the image display device 66 or the like.

When the bonus AT state occurs, the normal AT state is entered after the bonus AT state ends. In this case, when the bonus AT state ends and the normal AT state is entered, not only the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state but also the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. In this way, when the conditions for shifting to the normal AT state are satisfied, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state without waiting for the occurrence of the bell winning three times. It is possible to set the signal to the ON state early.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 66, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state will be described.

66A shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 66B shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 66C shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 66D shows the bonus. 66(e) shows the execution period of the game in which the transition to the bonus AT state is triggered, FIG. 66(f) shows the execution period of the other game, and FIG. 66(g). Shows the setting status of the wait period, and FIG. 66(h) shows the occurrence status of the bell prize.

As shown in FIG. 66(e), at the timing of t1 in the situation where the AT is in the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 66(c) and the AT1 signal is in the ON state as shown in FIG. 66(a). , The game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t2 when the game ends, the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66(c), while the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 66(d). At the timing of t2, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 66(a).

After that, at the timing of t3, another game is started as shown in FIG. 66(f). In this case, the measurement of the wait period (8 sec) is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 66(g). Then, when the wait period elapses at the timing of t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 66(b).

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 66(f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 66(g), the bonus AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 66(d), and further, in FIG. 66(b). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Further, at the timing of t6, the normal AT state is restarted as shown in FIG. 66(c). However, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state, and this OFF state is maintained after the timing of t7, which is the timing after the wait period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(g). Maintained.

After that, in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 66(h), the bell winning occurs at the timing of t8, the timing of t9, and the timing of t10, respectively, and as shown in FIG. 66(a) at the timing of t10. Then, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

A privilege point counter is provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and the privilege points selected by the privilege point winning in the privilege point lottery process are added to the privilege point counter. Then, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, the normal AT state continues. Further, when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is added, and when the addition is performed in the addition state lottery processing, the remaining executions in the normal AT state are executed. The number of times is added. In this case, when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, or when the additional lottery process results in an additional win, the number of remaining executions itself is not stored, but the bonus reference value is stored in the bonus point counter. The configuration is such that information corresponding to ×n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. Therefore, it is possible to commonly use the privilege point counter in the configuration in which the mode of the extended holiday resort in the normal AT state is diversified as described above. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate the storage areas to be referred to when determining whether or not the normal AT state should be connected, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. In addition, in a configuration in which data is handled in 1-byte units, the required storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a remaining execution count counter are provided in byte units.

When a prize lottery trigger is won, one bonus point is selected from a plurality of types of bonus points by the bonus point lottery process, so the bonus points are awarded when the bonus lottery trigger is won. It is possible to diversify the mode of addition. In addition, since all the privilege points selected in this case are smaller than the privilege reference numerical value, the accumulative acquisition of privilege points will cause a continuous AT state condominium, and the normal AT state continues. It is possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation of staying in a residence.

When the normal AT state is extended, the privilege points corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value are subtracted from the privilege point counter. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the privilege point counter is commonly used, it is possible to standardize the handling of privilege points when a normal AT-state condominium is generated, and the processing load is reduced.

The privilege point is greater than the privilege standard value x(n-1) and smaller than the privilege standard value xn (n is an integer of 1 or more), and exceeds the privilege standard value x(n-1). Information corresponding to the numerical value of minutes is notified by the privilege point notification unit 67. As a result, the player can play the game while clearly recognizing how much privilege points are needed to generate a normal AT-state condominium, and the player's expectation is favorable. Can be increased to In this case, the privilege point notification unit 67 reports the remaining value when the privilege point is divided by the privilege reference value. With this, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is commonly used, it is possible to derive the value of the privilege point notified by the privilege point notification unit 67 with a simple processing configuration.

In a situation where the privilege point is a privilege standard value xn or more and a value smaller than the privilege standard value x(n+1) (n is an integer of 1 or more), the information corresponding to the n is stored in the stock notification unit 68. Be informed. As a result, the player can recognize the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state, and the player's sense of superiority can be suitably increased. In this case, the stock notification unit 68 reports the value of the quotient when the privilege points are divided by the privilege reference value. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the privilege point counter is commonly used, the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state notified by the stock notification unit 68 can be derived with a simple processing configuration.

In the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state, when the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value, the additional state is entered. Then, a situation may occur in which the value of the privilege reference numerical value×n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter in the added state. This allows each of these states to be closely related.

When the privilege points are equal to or more than the privilege reference value when the pre-branching AT state or the branch AT state ends, in a configuration in which the normal AT state is connected, the privilege points are less than the privilege reference value. When the normal AT state is in the continuous AT state due to the continuation condition, the privilege points less than the privilege reference value are retained even in the normal AT state at the continuous holiday destination. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the privilege points exceeding the privilege reference numerical value, and it is possible to generate many opportunities to have an expectation as to whether the privilege points can exceed the privilege reference numerical value. Further, according to this configuration, even if the privilege points are acquired immediately before the termination of the pre-branching AT state or the branch AT state, it is possible to receive the benefit of the privilege points. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the condition for acquiring privilege points will be satisfied at any timing of the AT state before branch and the AT state before branch. Furthermore, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the profit in the case where the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the normal AT state is extended.

Not only the normal AT status is extended when the AT is continuously won in the AT continuous lottery process, but also the normal AT status is extended when the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the normal AT state is connected, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the normal AT state to be connected.

When the normal AT state is connected, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect in the branched AT state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the winning effect or the drawing effect to be executed, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the number of executions of the winning effect is the predetermined number of executions (12 times), the probability of being the AT continuous winning is the highest probability regardless of the probability of being the AT continuous winning at that time. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the winning effect will be executed.

In addition, since the winning effect is executed even when the normal AT state is continuous because the remaining execution number is 1 or more, the number of executions of the winning effect is predetermined as the number of remaining executions is increased. The expectation that the number of executions will be increased. Therefore, when a large number is set as the number of remaining executions, not only the benefit that the number of continuous vacations in the normal AT state increases, but also the probability that the probability of being continually winning the AT increases becomes high. Therefore, the advantage of setting a large number as the remaining execution number is enhanced.

The number-of-wins notification unit 69 reports the number of times the winning effect has been executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation that the number of times the winning effect is executed reaches the predetermined number of times.

Since the stock notification unit 68 reports the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state, it is possible to let the player recognize at least to what extent the normal AT state is connected through the stock notification unit 68. It is possible to increase the sense of superiority. In addition, the player himself/herself can recognize the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect will become the predetermined number of executions, in relation to the remaining number of executions as grasped by the stock notification unit 68. As a result, it becomes possible to closely associate the continuous AT in the normal AT state related to the remaining number of executions with the probability of being in the AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process. Can be made synergistic.

When the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more, priority is given to exhausting the number of remaining executions, and the AT continuous lottery process is not executed. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation failure occurs in the AT continuous lottery process, it becomes possible to prevent the normal AT state from being connected more than necessary.

When the normal AT state is continuous, there is a high probability that the AT continuous lottery process will result in an AT continuous win. As a result, when the normal AT state is extended, the extended holiday is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the normal AT state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player when the normal AT state is condominium, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation win, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed, and the promotion continuation win results in a higher probability of becoming the AT continuation win. As a result, the player's attention is raised on whether or not the AT continuous winning is achieved in the AT continuous lottery process. Further, by executing the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process in this way, it is possible to set the probability of being promoted in the promotion lottery process independently of the probability of being AT continuous win. This increases the degree of freedom in setting the probability.

In the branched AT state, a battle effect corresponding to whether or not a normal AT state condominium is generated is executed, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the normal AT state is concomitant. It becomes possible and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the winning effect is executed as the battle effect, there is a high possibility that the AT continuing lottery process has a high probability of winning the AT continuing. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a winning effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the AT continuous lottery process, if the AT continuous winning is achieved, the victory effect or the draw effect is executed as the battle effect, and when the victory effect is executed as the battle effect, the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed and the promotion concerned. By being promoted in the lottery process, the probability of continuous AT win is increased. In this case, when the victory effect or the draw effect is executed as the battle effect, the continuous AT in the normal AT state is determined, so the player should play the game while expecting the victory effect or the draw effect to be executed. Becomes Further, when the winning effect is executed out of the winning effect and the drawing effect, there is a possibility that the AT is continuously won, so the player expects to further execute the winning effect. A game will be played. As a result, the player's expectation can be made multi-tiered, and the interest of the game can be improved.

If the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more and the normal AT state continues, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the chance of being set to have a high probability of being promoted in the promotion lottery process from becoming unnecessarily increased.

Even if the AT continuation lottery process fails to continue the AT, if the bonus points are equal to or higher than the bonus reference numerical value in the situation where the defeat production is being executed in the subsequent branch AT state, the normal AT state continues. .. As a result, even if the privilege points cannot reach the privilege reference value or more by the time the AT state before branch ends, if the privilege points have a larger value, the normal AT-state condominium is more likely to occur. , The degree of attention to the acquisition of privilege points is increased.

Even in the case where the AT continuation lottery process causes the AT continuation failure, the AT continuation lottery process is re-executed after the condominium in a configuration in which the normal AT state is in a condominium state when other continuation conditions are satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing of ending the extended game in the normal AT state, and it is possible to preferably maintain the player's expectation in the normal AT state.

In the case where the AT continuation lottery process causes an AT continuation discontinuance, when other continuation conditions are satisfied and the normal AT state continues, and the AT continuation lottery process is executed, the AT continuation lottery process on the subsequent side It is possible that there is a high probability that the player will continue to win the AT. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the normal AT state will be linked even if an event that causes a continuation of AT failure occurs in the AT continuous lottery process, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The probability of winning the AT continuation lottery in the AT continuation lottery process increases as the continuation win occurs in the AT continuation lottery process, and the number of executions of the winning effect is predetermined even if the AT continuation lottery process does not result in the continuous win. The higher the number of executions (12 times), the higher it becomes. As a result, it is highly probable that an AT continuous win will occur in both cases where the AT is continuously won in the AT continuous lottery process and the normal AT state continues, and when the AT is out of continuation and the normal AT state continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for the normal AT state to be extended, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Even if the privilege points are not equal to or greater than the privilege reference value and the AT continuation lottery process causes the AT to be out of the continuation, the normal AT state is continuously operated by being revived in the final chance state by the revival lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to provide many opportunities for the normal AT state to be extended. In this case, the probability of winning a resurrection in the resurrection lottery process differs depending on the privilege points. As a result, even if the privilege points are less than the privilege reference numerical value, the privilege points affect the probability of being rehabilitated in the recovery lottery process, and it is possible to increase the attention level of the privilege points. In particular, the greater the value of the privilege points, the higher the probability of being revived. Therefore, even if the privilege points cannot exceed the privilege reference numerical value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the acquisition of the privilege points.

Regardless of whether the normal AT state is extended due to the AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process, or the normal AT state is extended due to the privilege points being equal to or more than the privilege reference value, While the remaining privilege points are carried over to the normal AT state of the condominium destination, when the recovery lottery process results in a recovery win, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to limit the benefit of acquiring privilege points to some extent. In addition, there are cases where the privilege points are inherited and cases where the privilege points are not inherited, depending on the type of event that triggered the condominium in the normal AT state, and the manner of inheriting the privilege points is diversified. .. Therefore, the mode of progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege points, and the interest of the game is improved.

The probability of winning a resurrection in the resurrection lottery process varies depending on not only the privilege points but also the winning combination in the game. As a result, the points to be noticed in executing the revival lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

If the winning opportunity for extension is won in the final chance state, the final chance state is extended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the rehabilitation lottery process does not result in a rehabilitation win despite the fact that the player has won the extension trigger.

The transition to the normal AT state may occur based on the normal replay winning in the transition chance state. As a result, a game is played while expecting to be a normal replay winning combination in the transition chance state, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the expectation improving role is won in the transition chance state, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state becomes high. As a result, in the transition chance state, it is expected that not only the normal replay role but also the expectation improving role can be won, and the winning role can be diversified. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

If you are elected to improve the expectation, the chance of transition will be extended. As a result, when the expectation improving role is won, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition opportunity state increases. In addition, the probability of winning a transition win in the transfer lottery process increases because the expectation improving role is won and the transfer probability UP win is obtained in the transfer probability UP lottery process. As a result, when the expectation improving role is won, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition opportunity state increases.

The probability of winning the normal replay role is higher than the probability of winning the expectation improving role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the normal replay combination is won in the transition chance state, and it is possible to give many opportunities to expect the transition to the normal AT state. In addition, when a winning combination with a low winning probability is won, a situation that is advantageous for the player may occur, but when winning an expectation improving combination with a lower winning probability than a normal replay winning combination. Since the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs will be high, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when winning the expectation improving role.

The normal replay role serves as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but does not serve as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in other game states. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention that the normal replay combination is won in the transition chance state. In addition, the expectation improving role does not serve as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but serves as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to give the player recognition that the expectation improving combination is an advantageous combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the expectation improving combination.

If the first to third special replay combination is won or if the lottery process results in a miss, a start wait time is set at the end of that game, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start spinning in the next game. Be waited for. Then, when the start wait time is set, the bonus AT state is started. In this case, the start of the bonus AT state can be emphasized by setting the start wait time. As a result, the player feels unexpected that the start wait time has been set, and enhances the feeling of uplifting when the bonus AT state is started. On the other hand, in the bonus AT state, the player's consciousness is focused on the digestion of the game. Therefore, if the start wait time is set in the middle of the game, it may make the player feel that it is annoying. On the other hand, in such a situation, since the start wait time is not set, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience.

In addition, even if the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, if the occurrence of the penalty event is dealt with, the bonus AT state is not entered. When the start wait time is set in such a situation, the player may feel uncomfortable, but in such a situation, the start wait time is not set, so that such an inconvenience should be prevented. Is possible.

If the player wins the first special replay role or if the lottery process results in a failure, a freeze time is set at the start of the game. When these lottery results are obtained, the start of the bonus AT state or the increase in the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state surely occurs. This makes it possible for the player to feel upset by feeling that the freeze time has been set, and to perform the game stop operation while recognizing the result of the lottery. Becomes Further, since such a function of the freeze time can occur regardless of whether or not the bonus AT state is set, it is possible to suitably cause the function by setting the freeze time even in the bonus AT state. It will be possible.

The main MPU 72 intentionally selects the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be stopped when the normal replay winning occurs in which the normal replay prize occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The side MPU 82 executes control for notifying the selected stop order when the normal AT state is linked. Then, in the main MPU 72, based on the fact that the selected stop order and the actual stop order match, the external output of the AT1 signal is set to the output corresponding to the continuous AT state. As a result, even if the sub-side MPU 82 is configured to independently manage the progress of the normal AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not need to transmit information to the main MPU 72 and is compatible with the normal AT state condominium. The external output setting can be performed in the main MPU 72.

When the normal replay combination is won, the main MPU 72 always executes the pushing order lottery process for selecting the stop order. As a result, it is not necessary to switch between the situation in which the push-order lottery processing is executed and the situation in which it is not executed, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

The normal replay combination is a combination with the highest winning probability in the normal AT state. Then, by using this normal replay combination in order to grasp the extended holidaymaker in the normal AT state, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to grasp this when the ordinary holidaymaker's holiday resort occurs. ..

The main side MPU 72 corresponds to the normal AT state condominium for the external output of the AT1 signal when the event in which the stop order selected when the normal replay combination is won coincides with the actual stop order occurs a plurality of times. Set the specified output. This reduces the possibility that the output setting will be performed when the coincident event happens by accident. In particular, the main MPU 72 sets the output setting when the coincident event occurs a plurality of times without the occurrence of an event in which the selected stop order does not match the actual stop order when the normal replay combination is won. Therefore, the possibility that the output setting is performed when the coincident event happens by chance is greatly reduced.

The normal replay winning combination is a winning combination regardless of the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in relation to the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. .. As a result, the player's profit does not change depending on whether or not the stop order is notified, so that it is hard to cause a restriction in notifying the stop order.

The stop order that is selected when the normal replay combination is won does not include the stop order that first stops the left reel 32L. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first. Therefore, when the stop order is selected as described above, the player usually wins the replay combination. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order coincide with each other occurs accidentally.

The sub-side MPU 82 can notify a stop order different from the stop order selected by the main-side MPU 72 when a normal replay combination is won in a situation where a normal AT state condominium has not occurred. This makes it possible to positively prevent an accidental occurrence of an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order match when the normal replay combination is won, and the main MPU 72 can grasp the contents. It is possible to improve accuracy.

When the event in which the stop order selected when the normal replay combination is won and the actual stop order occur more than once occurs, the main side MPU 72 causes the AT1 signal external output to be in the normal AT state. In the configuration in which the corresponding output setting is performed, the sub-side MPU 82 notifies a stop order different from the selected stop order when the coincident event occurs once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the stop order is notified.

In each of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the execution of the push order notification for generating the bell winning, thereby reducing the processing load of the main-side MPU 72. In this case, the sub-side MPU 82 does not make all the determinations of the termination trigger for the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, but the main-side MPU 72 makes the determination of the termination trigger for the bonus AT state. As a result, in the bonus AT state of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 can set the end wait time for enhancing the effect, and the processing load of the main MPU 72 can be reduced. However, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

In the bonus AT state, only the transition triggered by the lottery processing result of the winning combination occurs, whereas in the normal AT state, not only the transition triggered by the lottery processing result of the winning combination in the transition chance state, but also the ceiling game There will also be transitions triggered by digestion. As a result, a plurality of types of transition patterns in the normal AT state are set while reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72 by limiting the transition patterns for the bonus AT state in which the transition control is performed by the main MPU 72. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

More patterns of continuation conditions are set in the normal AT state than in the bonus AT state. Accordingly, in the bonus AT state in which the continuous control is performed by the main MPU 72, the processing pattern of the main MPU 72 is reduced by limiting the pattern of satisfying the continuous condition. By setting a plurality of types, it becomes possible to diversify the game.

In the case where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the first bell combination or the first bell combination is generated. The AT1 signal is set to the ON state on the basis of the fact that the main MPU 72 specifies that the bell prize has been generated in the case of winning the 2 bell role. As a result, even if the sub-side MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, it is not necessary to transmit information from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main-side MPU 72, and the output setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state is set. It becomes possible to do.

The main MPU 72 sets the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the output setting to the ON state is performed when the bell prize is accidentally generated. In particular, the main MPU 72 performs the above output setting when the bell winning occurs a plurality of times without the occurrence of the bell winning regardless of winning the first bell role or the second bell role, The possibility that the output setting will be performed when the bell winning occurs by chance is greatly reduced.

The stop order that enables the bell winning when the first bell or the second bell is won does not include the stop order that first stops the left reel 32L. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first. Therefore, by selecting the stop order as described above, there is a possibility that a bell winning may occur accidentally. It becomes possible to reduce.

When the winning of the bell is not generated in spite of winning the first bell role or the second bell role, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, the main MPU 72 may monitor whether or not a bell winning has occurred in both cases of setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load is reduced.

The number of occurrences of bell winnings that triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state is greater than the number of occurrences of out-of-order pressing at the time of winning the bell role that triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state. This makes it possible to accurately set the AT1 signal to the ON state while enabling the AT1 signal to be set to the OFF state early when the normal AT state ends.

There are two types of winning combinations to be monitored when the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the OFF state, that is, a first bell combination and a second bell combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each winning combination and to generate many triggers for each output setting.

When the winning state of the CB combination is maintained, the transition to the normal AT state occurs. As a result, it is possible to limit the period in which the transition to the normal AT state is possible in relation to the winning combination, and the player pays attention to winning the CB combination and maintaining the winning state of the CB combination. Becomes Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game content.

In the CB state, the number of medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player does not increase. In this case, when the winning state of the CB combination is achieved, the generation of the prize shifts to the unfavorable CB middle state, while the generation of the prize does not occur, the transition to the normal AT state may occur. There is a nature. As a result, it is possible to make a great difference in the profit of the player depending on whether or not the CB prize is generated, and it is possible to increase the attention of the game in the winning state of the CB combination.

In the CB state, the medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase, but do not decrease. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated the CB prize.

An internal state notification unit 63 is provided which is turned on when a winning CB combination is won. This makes it possible to urge the player not to generate the winning when the winning combination of the CB combination is achieved.

In the configuration where the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the normal AT state is set, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the bonus AT state is set, the CB role In the case of winning, the internal state informing unit 63 is turned on before the ON state of the AT1 signal and the ON state of the AT2 signal are set. This allows the player to be notified before the outside of the slot machine 10 is notified that the winning combination of the CB combination is achieved.

When the winning combination of CB is won, the internal state notifying unit 63 is turned on before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the winning of the CB combination is won before the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the game is started, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the CB winning.

When the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, or when a CB winning occurs in the bonus AT state, the game contents in the CB state are prioritized, and the game amount executed in the CB state continues in the bonus AT state. It is treated as a digest of the number of games. As a result, the player will play the game so that the CB winning is not generated when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied or in the bonus AT state. Therefore, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is carefully performed, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as compared to a configuration in which the bonus AT state is simply invalidated, the bonus AT state and the CB in-progress state can be associated with each other, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Even if the in-CB state is ended, the bonus AT state is not immediately returned to, but the bonus AT state is returned to by the winning state of the CB combination. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the CB role after the end of the CB state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the game amount required until the winning state of the CB combination is achieved is treated as the consumption amount of the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state. As a result, after the end of the CB state, the game is played while expecting to win the CB role until the number of games in the bonus AT state is completed and the number of games is completed. ..

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the AT1 signal when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the state shifts to the bonus AT state is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the AT1 signal and AT2 signal setting processing executed by the main MPU 72. The setting process is executed instead of the external output setting process (step S216) at the end of the normal process (FIG. 11).

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied. When a positive determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether the output state of the AT1 signal is the ON state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3802, then in step S3803 the intermediate transition flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The midway shift flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the shift to the bonus AT state has been made in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state. After that, in step S3804, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3802, or if the process of step S3804 is executed, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3805.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3806 whether or not the bonus AT state has ended. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3806, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3807. In subsequent step S3808, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the midway transition flag of the main RAM 74. If "1" is set, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3809.

When the process of step S3805 is executed, when the negative determination is made in step S3806, when the negative determination is made in step S3808, or when the process of step S3809 is executed, other processes are performed in step S3810. Run. In other processes, the processes of steps S3101 to S3114 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the first embodiment are executed. Then, this setting process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT1 signal is switched to the bonus AT state in the ON state, the AT1 signal set to the OFF state at the transition of the bonus AT state is set when the bonus AT state ends. It is set to the ON state again. When the state shifts to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state, the remaining continuous game in the normal AT state at that time is held, and when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state is restarted from the state of the remaining continuous game. It In this case, if the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state is applied on the condition that the bell prize is generated a plurality of times as in the case where the non-AT state is shifted to the normal AT state, the bell prize is generated a plurality of times. There is a possibility that the remaining continuous game will be exhausted and the normal AT state will end without the AT1 signal being set to the ON state. On the other hand, in the situation where the bonus AT state ends and returns to the normal AT state as described above, by setting the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT after the return is set. It is possible to set the AT1 signal to the ON state by the time the state ends.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the mode of the final chance state is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the final chance state setting processing executed by the sub MPU 82. The setting process is executed when shifting to the final chance state.

First, in step S3901, the value of the privilege point counter is grasped. In a succeeding step S3902, the grasped value of the bonus point counter is set in the continuing game counter provided in the sub RAM 84. The continuous game counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining continuous games in the final chance state.

Then, in step S3903, the revival lottery table corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter grasped in step S3901 is read from the sub-side ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set such that the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of being resurrected in the resurrection lottery process. Then, the setting process of the final chance state is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the probability of being revived in the rehabilitation lottery process increases according to the value of the privilege point counter, but also the number of continuing games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter is set. As a result, the importance of the value of the privilege point counter is increased, and the expectation for winning the privilege lottery trigger opportunity during the normal AT state is increased.

Instead of setting the value of the bonus point counter as it is in the continuous game counter, the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the bonus point counter may be set in the continuous game counter. For example, a plurality of stages may be set according to the value range of the privilege point counter, and the number of continuing games corresponding to the stages may be set in the continuing game counter. Further, as a configuration for setting the number of continuous games for which the value of the privilege point counter is doubled, the number of continuous games for which the value of the privilege point counter is tripled, or the number of continuous games for a predetermined integer multiple of four or more. Good.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing contents when the normal AT state ends are different from those in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the termination processing of the normal AT state executed by the sub MPU 82. The ending process is executed when the final chance state ends without being revived.

First, in step S4001, a privilege point holding lottery process is executed. In the holding lottery process, the holding lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is regularly (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. It collates with the holding lottery table. The holding lottery table is set so that the holding lottery table has a probability of 1/2, for example.

In a succeeding step S4002, it is determined whether or not the result of the holding lottery processing in the step S4001 is a holding win. If it is not a holding win, in step S4003, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0" and then the ending process of the normal AT state is ended. If it is a holding win, the value of the bonus point counter is maintained as it is. The ending process of the normal AT state is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the normal AT state ends in a situation where the number of remaining sets is “0”, the value of the privilege point counter may be succeeded to the next normal AT state. As a result, when the normal AT state is ended with the value of the privilege point counter remaining to some extent, the next normal AT state has a high expectation of the condominium. In this case, it becomes possible to increase the player's motivation to continue the game.

The probability of winning the holding in the holding lottery process may be changed according to the value of the privilege point counter. For example, the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of being held.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following different form may be applied to the configuration of the above-described embodiment individually or in combination.

(1) In the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502), a value less than the privilege reference numerical value is selected when the privilege point is won, but a value greater than the privilege reference numerical value can be selected. May be In this case, the sub-side MPU 82 can specify that the configuration for shifting to the additional state or the condition for transitioning to the additional state is satisfied at the timing when the value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value is selected in the privilege point lottery process. By configuring the data setting, both the bonus points when the bonus points are selected in the bonus point lottery process and the bonus points when the bonus points are selected in the bonus lottery process (step S2808) are added to the bonus point counter. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the transition condition to the additional state.

(2) The sub-side RAM 84 is provided with a remaining set number counter in the normal AT state, and the value of the remaining set number counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. It may be configured to subtract the privilege reference numerical value. In addition, in the case where the addition is won in the addition lottery processing (step S2808), the added remaining set count is added to the remaining set count counter without adding the privilege points to the privilege point counter. Good. In this case, it becomes possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to know the number of remaining sets separately from the privilege points. For example, when performing the light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67, the privilege point counter is referred to, and the light emission of the stock notification unit 68 is performed. When performing control, it is possible to adopt a processing configuration that refers to the remaining set number counter.

(3) The privilege reference numerical value is not limited to “7” and is arbitrary. However, in the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502), the minimum value selected in the privilege point lottery process is selected so that the event becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value when the event that the privilege point is won occurs a plurality of times. It is preferable to set the value to be twice or more the value of the privilege points.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the bonus point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) is executed when the bonus lottery trigger role is won, the bonus point lottery process is performed when the prize is won by winning the bonus lottery trigger role. The configuration may be such that (step S2002, step S2502) is executed. In this case, as the privilege lottery trigger role, a winning combination is not generated according to the operation operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. May be included or may not be included.

(5) The privilege point counter may have a data capacity larger than 1 byte. Even in this case, in a configuration in which each counter is handled in units of bytes, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity by commonly using the privilege point counter. For example, when the privilege points and the number of remaining sets of the normal AT are managed by different counters, if the privilege point counter is configured with 2 bytes and the remaining set number counter is configured with 1 byte, 3 bytes are required. However, it is possible to reduce the amount by 1 byte by sharing it as a special point counter of 2 bytes.

(6) Instead of the configuration in which the bonus point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) is executed when the bonus lottery trigger role is won, the bonus point lottery process is executed when the bonus lottery trigger role is won. Alternatively, the privilege points corresponding to the winning lottery triggering role may be added to the privilege point counter. In this case, since the privilege point lottery process is not executed, the processing load is reduced, and the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger role and the privilege points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game Is increased.

(7) If you win the privilege lottery opportunity, a lottery will be performed to determine whether or not to add bonus points. If you win in the relevant lottery, the privilege points corresponding to the benefit lottery opportunity will be reward points. It may be configured to be added to the counter. In this case, the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger role and the privilege points is clarified, and the attention to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game is increased.

(8) Instead of the configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter commonly used is set separately for the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68, the value of the privilege point counter is directly used by the predetermined notification unit. It may be configured to be informed. In this case, by allowing the player to recognize privilege points corresponding to the occurrence of one remaining set number, it becomes possible to recognize the number of remaining sets from the value of the privilege point counter and the remaining set number. It is possible to recognize the privilege points necessary for the number of times to be newly added once.

(9) In the case where the normal AT state is consecutively operated without passing through the final chance state, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference numerical value, the structure is surely succeeded to the normal AT state of the continuous destination. Then, it may be configured to be taken over when the takeover condition is satisfied. For example, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference numerical value when the succession lottery process is executed in the normal AT state, the value may be inherited. Also, for example, when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the inheritance reference numerical value, the composition may be inherited even if the value is less than the privilege reference numerical value.

(10) Even if a return to the normal AT state occurs in the final chance state, the privilege points less than the privilege reference value may be inherited to the normal AT state of the condominium destination. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege reference value.

(11) The value of the privilege point counter when the normal AT state has ended may be always inherited to the normal AT state that has been shifted due to a new shift condition being satisfied. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege reference value.

(12) In the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309), the AT is out of continuation, and the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or higher than the privilege reference value during the period in which the defeat effect is executed as the battle effect. In the case of occurrence, or in the final chance state, when a resurrection win occurs and a normal AT state condominium occurs, the AT continuation lottery process executes the promotion lottery process at the time of resurrection for the probability of being an AT continuation win, When the promotion is selected in the promotion lottery process, the probability that the AT is continuously won may be increased. In this case, the probability of becoming the promotion win may be set to be higher than the probability of being the promotion win in the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316) that occurs when the AT continuation win is performed and the winning effect is executed. Good. Further, in the final chance state, it may be configured such that the probability of being continually winning the AT is likely to be higher when the winning of the revival is won. In these cases, when the normal AT-state condominium condition is satisfied, the normal AT-state condominium condition is more likely to occur when the condition set as the rear order is satisfied, so that the player's expectation Can be maintained high until the end of the normal AT state.

(13) A process of setting the AT continuation probability to the highest probability in relation to the winning counter so that the normal AT state is more likely to be connected together (step S2308) and the AT continuation probability In addition to or instead of the configuration for executing the promotion lottery process (step S2316), a configuration that facilitates the acquisition of privilege points, a configuration that increases the value of the acquired privilege points, a configuration that facilitates the acquisition of large privilege points, and the remaining By adopting at least one of a configuration in which the probability that the number of sets is added is high and a configuration in which a large number of remaining set numbers are easily selected, the normal AT state is linked to the bonus points. It may be configured to be easy.

(14) When the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) causes the AT to be out of continuation but the normal AT state continues, the probability that the AT continuation lottery process will be executed subsequently is low. The configuration may be changed or decreased. In this case, it is possible to suppress the probability that the normal AT state will be connected while guaranteeing the opportunity for the normal AT state to be connected.

(15) The types of probabilities that the AT is continuously won in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) are not limited to six types and are arbitrary, and may be two types, three types, four types, or five types. Well, it may be seven or more kinds. However, in order to generate an opportunity to be set to the highest probability regardless of the probability of being AT continuous winning, it is preferable that there are three or more types of probability of being AT continuous winning.

(16) Instead of the configuration in which the probability that the AT continuous winning will be the highest probability in the AT continuous lottery processing (step S2309) when the number of executions of the winning effect reaches the predetermined number of executions is the highest probability, the AT continuous probability promotion lottery processing The number of stages in which the probability is higher than that in the case where the promotion is won in (step S2316) may be set. For example, when the number of times the winning effect is executed reaches a predetermined number of times in the configuration in which the probability of being continuously winning the AT is increased by one step when the promotion is won in the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316). It is conceivable that there will be a two-stage or higher probability that the AT will continue to be won.

(17) The number of executions of the winning effect required for setting the probability that the AT will continue to be won is not limited to 12, and may be any number of times, such as 1 or 2 times. , 3 times, 4 times, 13 times or more. However, in order to increase the attention to the number of times the winning effect is executed, it is preferable that the number is twice or more.

(18) Instead of a configuration in which the number of executions of the winning effect is not inherited to the normal AT state that is transitioned when the next transition condition is satisfied, it may be configured to be reliably inherited or may be configured to be inheritable. As a configuration that can be handed over, a configuration may be adopted in which a takeover lottery process that is a succession winning with a predetermined probability is executed, and it is taken over when the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference numerical value but is the handover reference numerical value or more. May be

(19) In order to execute the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316), AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) results in AT continuous winning, and further battle lottery process (step S2311) produces a winning effect. Although it was necessary to be selected, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed when the AT continuous win is obtained instead of the AT continuous win. The promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed when the winning effect is executed regardless of the above. Further, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed when the normal AT state is continuous.

(20) The victory effect in the battle effect may be a victory that can be selected only when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or more than the privilege reference value, and the AT continuous winning is performed in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309). The configuration may be selected only when In this case, in order to set a high probability that the AT will continue to be won in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect, it is necessary to generate many target conditions among the above conditions, and thus the probability that the AT will continue to win. It is possible to suppress the possibility that the value will be set high.

(21) The probability that the winning effect is selected in the battle lottery process (step S2303, step S2311, step S2605) may be changed. For example, the higher the number of times the winning effect is executed, the higher the probability that the winning effect is selected, or the lower the probability. In this case, depending on the number of executions of the winning effect, the winning effect may be easily selected or may be difficult to select. Further, the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability that the winning effect is selected, and the lower the value. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the privilege points with the winning effect. The probability that the winning effect is selected may be higher or lower as the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is higher. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the remaining set number with the winning effect.

(22) When the number of times the normal AT state has been consecutively set is a predetermined number of times of execution (for example, 20 times) because the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that the AT will continue to be won is high (for example, the highest probability). In this case, the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state and the probability of winning the AT continuously in the AT continuous lottery process are more closely related.

(23) Probability of continuous winning of AT in the continuous AT lottery process (step S2309) according to the number of times the winning effect has been executed or the number of times the normal AT state has continued due to the number of remaining sets being 1 or more. May be increased stepwise. For example, if the number of times becomes the first reference number (for example, 3 times), the probability of winning the AT continuation is increased by one level, and if the number of times becomes the second reference number (for example, 5 times), the AT is continued. The probabilities of being elected may be further increased by two steps, and the probabilities set in relation to the reference number may be different.

(24) Although the stock notification unit 68 is configured to perform the notification according to the number range of the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state, instead of this, the notification corresponding to the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state on a one-to-one basis. May be performed, or the remaining set number may be notified as it is.

(25) Even if the number of remaining sets is 1 or more, or even if the AT continuous lottery process results in an AT continuous win, once the normal AT state has been executed once, the non-AT state is temporarily entered. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a new execution time of the normal AT state occurs again after the transition.

(26) The bonus points may not be referred to when the restoration lottery process is executed in the final chance state. In this case, in the rehabilitation lottery process, the lottery is performed according to the lottery process result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game. In this configuration, when the return chance is obtained in the final chance state, the privilege points may not be inherited to the normal AT state of the condominium destination as in the above embodiment, or may be inherited.

(27) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the privilege points less than the privilege reference value are referred to in the final chance state recovery lottery process (step S2907), the value is less than the privilege reference value in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309). The bonus points may be referred to, and the larger the bonus points, the higher the probability that the AT will continue to be won. In this case, the bonus point counter may be cleared to "0" when the AT is continuously won in the AT continuous lottery process, and the bonus point counter may be cleared to "0" and the normal AT state of the condominium destination may be taken over. It may be configured to be.

(28) In the final chance state, instead of the configuration in which the probability of being revived in the rehabilitation lottery process (step S2907) changes according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game, the rejuvenation win is obtained according to the winning result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that In this case, as a role of varying the probability of being revived, the winning order according to the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It may be configured to include a winning combination that does not occur or may not be included.

(29) The final chance state is configured to continue for a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and in the final chance state, the number of times the player has won or won the predetermined role such as the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role. In accordance with the resurrection lottery process (step S2907), the probability of winning the resurrection may change. For example, when the predetermined winning combination is won once or twice, the first winning probability is set, and when the third winning is four to four times, the second winning probability is higher than the first winning probability. Can be considered. In this case, the player pays attention to the number of times the predetermined winning combination is won in the final chance state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(30) The final chance state is configured to continue for a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and points are added according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) or the winning result in the final chance state. The normal AT state may be continued according to the accumulated points. In this case, the bonus points may be added even in the final chance state, and the normal AT state may be continued when the bonus points become equal to or more than the bonus reference numerical value in the final chance state.

(31) The final chance state is configured to continue for a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the normal AT state is continuously operated according to the number of winnings of a predetermined hand or the number of winnings of a predetermined hand in the final chance state. It may be configured to. In this case, the higher the number of executions of the monitoring event out of the number of times of winning the predetermined winning combination and the number of winnings of the predetermined combination, the higher the probability that the normal AT state will be linked is, and the number of executions of the monitoring event is 0. The configuration may be such that the normal AT state is continuous when the number of times is or the maximum number of times. In addition, in order to allow the player to clearly recognize whether or not a monitoring event has occurred, it is preferable that the predetermined combination is a combination in which a so-called dropout does not occur, for example, a normal replay combination. ..

(32) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won, but the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when another winning combination is won. May be configured. For example, the transfer lottery process (step S1609) may be executed when the first bell combination or the second bell combination, which is a combination in which no prize is generated, is won depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a transition lottery process (step S1609) when a winning combination of the first watermelon and the second watermelon is won. ) May be configured to be executed. In addition, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed regardless of which winning combination is won. In this case, the transition winning probability may be changed depending on the winning combination. Good.

(33) In the transfer chance state, the transfer lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay prize is generated, instead of the structure in which the transfer lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won. May be configured.

(34) In the transition chance state, the transition probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is executed when the expectation improving role is won, and the transition probability UP win is obtained, and thus the transition lottery process (step S1609) is selected. Although the configuration is such that the probability is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the expectation improving role is won, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may set a high probability of being a transition win. It may be configured to surely occur.

(35) In the transition chance state, when the expectation improving role is won, the number of continuous games in the transition chance state is surely extended. However, instead of this, when the expectation improving role is won. The number of continuous games may be extended when the lottery process executed is successful. A plurality of types of continuous games may be set, and the number of continuous games to be extended may be selected from among them.

(36) When the expectation improving role is won in the transition opportunity state, the processing of adding the privilege points to the privilege point counter may be executed. In this case, the bonus points may be inherited to the normal AT state on condition that the transition to the normal AT state has occurred in the transition opportunity state, and the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition opportunity state. Regardless of whether or not the bonus points are given, the privilege points may be taken over to the next normal AT state.

(37) In the above-described embodiment, although the penalty event occurs and the player is not in the non-AT state, the bell winning occurs three times and the AT1 signal is turned on, and in that situation, the second special replay role or the second special replay role is generated. When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped in the game winning the 3 special replay combination, the start wait time is set in the game. In this case, instead of the configuration in which the image indicating that the bonus AT state is started in the start wait time is displayed on the image display device 66, the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state in the penalty situation is satisfied. An image may be displayed on the image display device 66 so that the player can recognize that the profit is not given as a penalty target. Further, it may be configured to display a warning image for a penalty operation.

(38) In the bonus AT state, in the bonus AT state, instead of the configuration in which the start wait time is not set when the first to third special replay combinations are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) or when the result is a miss The start wait time may be set to be shorter than when the first to third special replay combinations are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in a situation where there is no such situation or when the result is missed.

(39) A configuration in which not only the start wait time is set but also the freeze time is not set when the first special replay combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the bonus AT state or when the result is missed. May be As a result, it is possible to increase the game digestion speed during the bonus AT state.

(40) Instead of the configuration in which the remaining number of sets in the bonus AT state is added when the first to third special replay combination is won or the result is missed in the bonus AT state, The number of continuous games may be extended.

(41) Although the pushing order selected by the main MPU 72 is not notified in the normal replay win in the addition state, instead of this, the pushing order may be notified even in the addition state. As a result, even when the normal AT state is shifted to the superimposition state in the pre-branching AT state immediately after the continuous operation, there is an opportunity to perform the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal.

(42) In the case where the normal AT state is continuous, the combination in which the push order is selected by the main MPU 72 for performing the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal is not limited to the normal replay combination, and other combinations are possible. It may be a role. In addition, a plurality of combinations including a normal replay combination may be targeted. However, the winning combination to be selected in the push order needs to be different from the winning combination in which the winning frequency is increased by notifying the stop order in the normal AT state and the bonus AT state. Further, it is preferable that the winning combination to be selected in the pressing order is a winning combination regardless of the pressing order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R when the winning is achieved, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are rotated. It is preferable that the winning combination is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the position.

(43) In the push-order lottery process (step S405) when the normal replay combination is won, a configuration in which the first stopped reel and the second stopped reel are selected from the reels 32L, 32M, 32R However, only the reels to be stopped first may be selected. Even in this case, the configuration in which the left reel 32L is not selected as the first stop makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the correct pressing order will occur accidentally.

(44) In addition to or in place of the configuration performed when the normal AT state is extended, the notification of the push order selected by the main MPU 72 when the normal replay combination is won shifts to the normal AT state It may be configured to be performed in the case. In this case, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the ON state when the push order is correct when the normal replay combination is won in a situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state. There is no need to set the signal to the ON state. Further, in a situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, the total number of times when the push order is correct in winning the normal replay combination and the number of times the bell prize is generated are the reference times for setting the ON state. In this case, the AT1 signal may be set to the ON state. In this case, when the normal AT state is entered, the timing of setting the AT1 signal to the ON state can be advanced.

(45) Even if it is not necessary to set the OFF/ON state of the AT1 signal, the main side MPU 72 selects the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub RAM 84 until the value becomes 1 or more. Instead of the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order different from the pressing order is not executed, the configuration in which the notification of the different pressing order is always performed in the situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF/ON state of the AT1 signal may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting of the OFF/ON state will occur accidentally.

(46) When the normal AT state shifts to the bonus AT state, the output state of the AT1 signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. However, instead of this, the output state of the AT1 signal is in the ON state. May be maintained. This allows the hall computer HC in the game hall to recognize the number of times the normal AT state is set.

(47) A configuration in which the AT2 signal is once set to the OFF state when one execution of the bonus AT state is completed even in the situation where the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is 1 or more as in the above embodiment. In, there is a setting difference between the remaining set number selected when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied and the remaining set number selected when the condition for adding the remaining set number is satisfied during the bonus AT state. It may be configured to have. In this case, by checking the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10.

(48) When the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state or the condition for adding the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is satisfied, one execution of the bonus AT state ends within the range of the number of remaining sets selected at one time ( Even if 30 games are over), the AT2 signal may not be set to the OFF state. In this case, the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC displays the total number of times the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state and the condition for adding the remaining set number in the bonus AT state are satisfied. In this configuration, the transition condition and the addition condition may have a setting difference. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC.

(49) The AT1 signal may be set to the OFF state when the number of occurrences of the bell winning does not occur during the winning of the first bell role or the second bell role for the predetermined number of OFF sides. .. In this case, the number of occurrences of bell prizes (number of times on the ON side) necessary for the AT1 signal to be set to the ON state may be larger than the number of times on the OFF side, and the number of times of ON side and the number of OFF side The number of times may be the same, and the number of times of OFF side may be larger than the number of times of ON side.

(50) By allowing the internal state notification unit 63 to display a plurality of types of emission colors, various internal states may be reported using the internal state notification unit 63. For example, the bonus AT state generated under the penalty situation may be notified separately from the post-CB internal state. In addition, in the case where there is a winning combination, if there is a BB (big bonus) combination and an RB (regular bonus) combination in addition to the CB combination, the winning combination is maintained until the winning occurs. The CB internal rear state, the BB internal rear state, and the RB internal rear state may be informed by the color of light emitted from the internal state notification unit 63.

(51) Instead of the configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is integrated with the acquired number display unit 62, the internal state notification unit 63 may be integrated in the credit display unit 61. Further, the internal state notification unit 63 may be provided separately from the acquired number display unit 62.

(52) The timing at which the internal state notification unit 63 starts to be turned on when the internal post-CB state is reached is not limited to the timing before the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and each reel is not limited. The lighting may be started after the rotation of the 32L, 32M, 32R is started and before the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is activated, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped last. The lighting may be started before the reel can be stopped.

(53) When a CB prize is generated when shifting to the bonus AT state, the shift to the bonus AT state may be invalidated.

(54) In the case where a CB winning occurs when the bonus AT state is executed, or when the bonus AT state is being executed, the number of games consumed in the CB state is equal to the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state. Although the number of games is subtracted, the number of games played after the end of the in-CB state and before reaching the in-CB post-state may not be subtracted from the number of continuous games.

(55) When the wait time is set by winning the first to third special replay combinations, the wait time is set at the start of the next game of the winning game. The configuration may be set at the end of the winning game.

(56) In any case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the ON state may be performed at the start of the next game of the game in which the setting condition for the ON state is satisfied. .. In any case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may be performed at the end of the game in which the setting condition for the OFF state is satisfied.

(57) The AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) may be informed of the probability of being in the AT continuation win, or may be configured to execute an effect capable of predicting the probability.

(58) In the above-described embodiment, the privilege to pay out the medals is given when the small winning combination is established. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the player may be given some privilege. I wish I had. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and credit management of medals owned by the player, increase of credited medals corresponds to awarding of a privilege.

(59) The present invention may be applied to a so-called A type slot machine, and is also applicable to B type, C type, composite type of A type and C type, composite type of B type and C type, RT game and CT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

(60) The designs of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, etc., but may be geometrical lines, figures, etc. Further, it is possible to configure the design by light, color, etc., the design can also be configured by a three-dimensional shape, etc., and a composite of these can also configure the design. That is, it is sufficient that the design has a function as information having distinctiveness.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been shown, but the invention may be applied to a pachinko machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. Good.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. When the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (a privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), privilege numerical value information (privilege point) corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value is stored in the privilege storage means (sub-side RAM 84). A first storage executing unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S2005, S2007, S2011, and S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege point counter),
When the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, a predetermined privilege granting means (in the sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player A function of making an affirmative decision in step S2301 to execute the subsequent processing and a function of making an affirmative decision in step S2609 of the sub-side MPU 82 to execute the subsequent processing),
If the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the bonus AT state is started, and the additional lottery process is the additional win), the information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value xn (n is an integer of 1 or more) is provided. Second storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1904, step S2405, step S2804, step S2810, and step S2904 in the sub MPU 82) stored in the privilege storage means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, regarding the provision of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the privilege numerical value information stored as the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied is accumulated and becomes the information of the privilege reference value or more. There are cases where the predetermined privilege is granted based on the satisfaction of the second privilege numerical value condition. As a result, the manner of giving the predetermined privilege is diversified, and the interest in the game is improved.

In this case, the number of times the predetermined privilege is granted is not stored when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, but information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value xn is stored in the privilege storage means. This makes it possible to commonly use the privilege storage means in the configuration in which the predetermined privilege granting modes are diversified as described above. Therefore, the storage means to be referred to when determining whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege can be integrated, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. In addition, the required storage capacity can be reduced. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. It is provided with a privilege numerical value lottery unit (a function of executing the process of step S2002 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines the privilege numerical value information to be stored by the first storage execution unit by the privilege numerical value lottery process. The gaming machine described in Feature A1.

According to the characteristic A2, it is possible to diversify the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storing means when the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, and the privilege numerical value information is accumulated when the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. As a result, diversification in the case where a predetermined privilege is granted is achieved.

As a more specific configuration of the characteristic A2, "a plurality of types of the privilege number information selected in the privilege number lottery process exist, and the privilege number information is information of a value smaller than the privilege reference number. The configuration is ".

Features A3. When updating the privilege storage means so that the privilege reference numerical value is subtracted when the predetermined privilege is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means (the processing of steps S2302 and S2604 in the sub-side MPU 82). The game machine according to feature A1 or A2, which is characterized by having a function of executing.

According to the characteristic A3, in the configuration in which the privilege storing means is commonly used both when the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, a privilege when a predetermined privilege is given It is possible to standardize the handling of numerical information. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Features A4. The numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is a numerical value larger than the privilege standard numerical value x(n-1) and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value xn (n is an integer of 1 or more). In a situation, a privilege numerical value notifying means for notifying information corresponding to a numerical value exceeding the privilege reference numerical value x (n-1) (a privilege point notification unit 67, a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the sub MPU 82) The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A4, it is possible for the player to recognize as the privilege numerical value information that is less than the grant of the predetermined privilege, and to what extent the privilege numerical value information is required in the situation where the first privilege numerical value condition can be satisfied. It becomes possible to play a game while clearly recognizing whether or not. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation.

Features A5. A division execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) for dividing the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value,
The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the privilege numerical value notifying unit notifies information corresponding to a numerical value of the remainder of the division result by the division executing unit.

According to the characteristic A5, in a configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used both when the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, a predetermined privilege is given as privilege numerical value information. It becomes possible to derive the numerical value of less than by the simple processing configuration.

Features A6. A situation in which the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is the privilege reference numerical value×n or more and smaller than the privilege reference numerical value×(n+1) (n is an integer of 1 or more). Any one of the characteristics A1 to A5 characterized by including a privilege number notification means (a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the stock notification unit 68 and the sub-side MPU 82) that notifies information corresponding to the n. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic A6, the player can recognize the number of times the predetermined privilege has been given, and the player's sense of superiority can be suitably increased.

Features A7. A division execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) for dividing the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value,
The amusement machine according to feature A6, wherein the privilege number notification means notifies information corresponding to a numerical value of a quotient of a division result by the division execution means.

According to the characteristic A7, the number of times the predetermined privilege is granted can be simplified in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used both when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied. It can be derived by the processing configuration.

Feature A8. The first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied in the gaming state corresponding to the first privilege (normal AT state),
As a result of the storage processing of the privilege numerical value information in the privilege storing means being executed by the first storage executing means in the game state corresponding to the first privilege, the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storing means is the privilege. When the information is equal to or more than the reference numerical value, means for shifting to the second privilege corresponding game state (additional state) in which the second privilege numerical value condition can be satisfied (the processing of steps S2104 to S2107 in the sub MPU 82 is executed). The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, which is provided with a function and a function of executing the processes of steps S2611 to S2614 in the sub-side MPU 82.

According to the characteristic A8, there are a gaming state in which the first privilege numerical value condition can be satisfied and a gaming state in which the second privilege numerical value condition can be satisfied, so that the gaming condition can be diversified. Also, since the privilege numerical value information becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value in the game state corresponding to the first privilege, the game state shifts to the second privilege corresponding game state, so that both game states can be closely related.

Feature A9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
At least one of the first privilege numerical value condition and the second privilege numerical value condition is a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated, or a winning after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is established according to a result.

With the gaming machine having the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature A10. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
The gaming machine is
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
Characteristic A9 is characterized in that the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a game state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when it becomes the order corresponding combination. Amusement machine.

With the gaming machine having the characteristic A10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When the privilege numerical value condition is met (the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege executing unit (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) stores the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) in the storage executing unit (sub). Function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the side MPU 82),
In the case of the judgment trigger, it is judged whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82). And a function for executing the processing of step S2609),
Predetermined privilege granting means (step in sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player when the privilege standard determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. A function of making an affirmative decision in S2301 to execute the subsequent processing and a function of making an affirmative decision in step S2609 of the sub-side MPU 82 to execute the subsequent processing),
Equipped with
A gaming machine, wherein the privilege numerical value information of the privilege storing means corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference numerical value can be taken over even after the determination trigger.

According to the feature B1, since the privilege numerical value information stored when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied becomes the information corresponding to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player has the privilege numerical value condition. The game is played while expecting to be established, and the game is performed while expecting that the privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

In this case, privilege numerical value information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference numerical value can be taken over even after the determination trigger. This increases the chances that the privilege numerical information will be information corresponding to values greater than or equal to the privilege reference numerical value, and the opportunity to have an expectation as to whether the privilege numerical information can be information corresponding to values greater than or equal to the privilege standard numerical value. It is possible to generate many. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a privilege numerical value condition, in a configuration provided with "a privilege numerical value lottery means for executing a privilege numerical value lottery process (a function for executing a privilege point lottery process in the sub-side RAM 84), the privilege numerical value lottery process is won. The condition is ". Further, the configuration may be such that “the privilege number information determined by the privilege number lottery process is stored in the privilege storage means”.

Feature B2. A feature B1 characterized in that the storage executing means stores, in the privilege storing means, privilege numerical value information corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. Amusement machine.

According to the feature B2, the privilege numerical value information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more can be obtained by accumulating the privilege numerical value information acquired when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the privilege numerical value condition a plurality of times in order to obtain the privilege numerical value information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more, and the player's expectation can be gradually increased.

Feature B3. The privilege numerical condition is configured to be satisfied in a game state (normal AT state) corresponding to the privilege,
It is a configuration in which one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege ends after the determination trigger is given,
Characteristic B1 or B2 characterized in that the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means in a predetermined corresponding game state corresponding to the privilege can be carried over to the game state corresponding to the privilege in the next execution time. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B3, the privilege numerical value information acquired in one execution of the privilege-enabled game state can be carried over to the privilege-enabled game state in the next execution, and thus acquired just before the end of the privilege-enabled game state. Even with the privilege numerical value information that has been given, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of it. As a result, the player can expect the satisfaction of the privilege numerical value condition at any timing of the game state corresponding to the privilege.

Feature B4. In the case where the continuation condition is satisfied, after one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege is finished, a new execution number of the game state corresponding to the privilege is started.
When the continuation condition is satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is continued, the numerical value information of the privilege stored in the privilege storage means is carried over to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation. A gaming machine described in B3.

According to the feature B4, when the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is continuous, the numerical value of the privilege is inherited to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation, so that the profit in the case where the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is connected is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the gaming state corresponding to the privilege will be extended.

Feature B5. The gaming state corresponding to the privilege is a gaming state in which the expectation level of the game medium is higher than the predetermined gaming state,
The predetermined privilege granting means determines that the continuation condition is satisfied when the privilege reference determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, and determines that the game state corresponding to the privilege is executed once. The game machine according to the feature B4, characterized in that a new execution number of the game state corresponding to the privilege is started after the end of.

According to the feature B5, since the privilege numerical value information becomes the information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more, the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is connected, so the game is performed while expecting that the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. It will be.

Feature B6. The characteristic B5 is characterized in that there is a condition different from the condition that the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value, as the continuation condition. Amusement machine.

According to the feature B6, the privilege corresponding game state can be extended if other continuation conditions are satisfied even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to the privilege reference numerical value or more. Therefore, the privilege corresponding game state. It is possible to give many opportunities to stay together. Further, even when the other continuation conditions are satisfied and the privilege-enabled game state is extended, the privilege-value information is inherited to the privilege-enabled game state after the continuation, so that the privilege-enabled game state is changed. It becomes possible to give a lot of chances to have a continuous holiday.

Feature B7. Even when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means can be carried over to the privilege-related game state generated by a new start timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4 to B6.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to give many opportunities to inherit the privilege numerical value information.

Feature B8. When the continuation condition is not satisfied, the takeover lottery means for determining whether or not to store and retain the privilege numerical value information stored in the benefit storage means (the process of step S4001 in the sub-side MPU 82 by A game machine according to Feature B7, which is provided with a function to execute.

According to the characteristic B8, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the privilege numerical value information is inherited.

Feature B9. When the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a large value, it is more likely to be taken over after the determination trigger than when it is information corresponding to a small value. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8.

According to the feature B9, even when the determination value is the privilege numerical value information corresponding to less than the privilege reference numerical value, the probability that the numerical value of the privilege numerical value information at that time is large is taken over more than the case where the numerical value is small. Since it becomes higher, it is advantageous to set the value of the privilege numerical information as large as possible. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's attention degree as to whether or not the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied.

Feature B10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
Characteristic B1 is characterized in that the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied in accordance with a result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. A gaming machine according to any one of to B9.

With the gaming machine having the feature B10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature B11. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
The gaming machine is
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the predetermined privilege enables execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination corresponds to the order.

With the gaming machine having the feature B11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A10, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Advantageous transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 in the sub-side MPU 82 and step S1706 to step in the sub-side MPU 82) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (normal AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined game state (non-AT state) Function for executing the processing of S1709),
In the case of a continuous lottery opportunity, a continuous lottery process is performed to execute a continuous lottery process as to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
In the case where the continuation lottery process causes a continuation disengagement, a predetermined transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) for transitioning to the predetermined game state after the post-sustaining discontinuation period,
Advantageous continuation means for starting a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state when the continuation condition is satisfied in the post-discontinuation period (function for executing setting processing of pre-branching AT state in sub-side MPU 82),
Equipped with
The continuation lottery executing means is for executing the continuation lottery process again after the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the post-continuation failure period and a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic C1, not only the advantageous gaming state is extended when the continuous lottery process is continuously won, but also advantageous when the continuation condition is satisfied in the post-continuation period when the continuation is missed. The game state is continuous. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous game state is extended, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous game state to be extended.

Further, even if the continuous lottery process is once out of the continuation, if the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state is continued in the subsequent out-of-continuation period, the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process is given again. Granted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the extended game in the advantageous game state ends, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation in the advantageous game state appropriately. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that one execution of the advantageous game state may be configured to end when the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is one game in which the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is started and ended. In this case, the game may be exhausted a predetermined number of times, or the end lottery process may result in end winning.

In addition, the period after the continuation disengagement may be a period in which a predetermined plurality of games are executed when the variable display of the symbols on the pattern display means is started and ended as one game. The effect indicating that it is a period may be executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C2. Providing probability improving means (function of executing the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) for increasing the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery processing than before,
When the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the post-continuation failure period and a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started, thereafter, by the probability improving means until the continuation lottery process is executed again. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the probability that the continuous winning is achieved can be increased.

According to the characteristic C2, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the out-of-continuation period and the advantageous gaming state is consecutively operated, not only is the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process given again, but also the continuous lottery to be executed again. There is a high probability that the process will result in continuous winning. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the player when the continuation condition is satisfied during the continuation outage period.

Feature C3. Characteristic C2 is characterized in that the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the highest probability when the highest probability setting condition is satisfied by repeating the execution times of the advantageous game state. Game machine.

According to the feature C3, the advantageous game states are linked to each other, which makes the player more advantageous. As a result, it is possible to increase the benefit of being given the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process again, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even during the continuation outage period.

It should be noted that there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types of probabilities of continuous winning.

Feature C4. The probability improving means,
A first probability improving means (a function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) capable of increasing the probability of becoming the continuous winning when the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process;
Even if the continuation lottery process causes a continuation failure, second probability improving means for increasing the probability of the continuation winning, at least on condition that a new execution of the advantageous gaming state is continued. (Function of executing the process of step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to C2 or C3, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic C4, both in the case where the continuous winning is selected in the continuous lottery process and the advantageous game state is connected, and in the case where the continuation failure occurs but the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state is connected. In the continuous lottery process, the probability of continuous winning may increase. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for the advantageous game state to be extended.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the second probability improving means has a larger increase in the probability of being continuously won than the first probability improving means.

According to the characteristic C5, it is possible to increase the profit in the case where the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state continues despite the non-continuation period.

Feature C6. A special storage means (a privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the number of remaining executions in the advantageous game state,
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the number of remaining executions of 1 or more, a new execution number of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5 characterized by being present.

According to the characteristic C6, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the game is in the advantageous game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being connected more than necessary, as compared with a configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation lottery process causes a continuation failure.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the continuation condition is that the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times.

According to the characteristic C7, it is possible to cause an event of occurrence of an extended game in the advantageous game state after the start of the post-continuation period while using the information indicating the remaining execution count.

Feature C8. If the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the memory executing means (step S2005, step S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , A function of executing the processing of steps S2011 and S2504),
In the case of the judgment trigger, it is judged whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82). And a function for executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
A configuration in which when the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the continuation condition is that the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value.

According to Feature C8, even if the privilege numerical value information is not information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more before the determination trigger, the privilege numerical value becomes the privilege reference numerical value or more in the period after the continuation failure. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is linked. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to make the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information larger before the judgment triggers. Therefore, the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment triggers. The game will be played while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature C9. In the case where the continuous lottery process results in a continuous winning, the configuration is such that a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started after a lapse of the continuous winning period, which is one of the features C1 to C8. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic C9, it is possible to teach the player that the continuous winning has been achieved.

The continuous winning period may be a period in which a plurality of predetermined games are executed when the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display means is started and ended as one game. The effect indicating that it is a period may be executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The continuation condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

With the gaming machine having the feature C10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature C11. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
The gaming machine is
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein the advantageous game state is a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

With the gaming machine having the characteristics C11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I11. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Advantageous transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 in the sub-side MPU 82 and step S1706 to step in the sub-side MPU 82) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (normal AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined game state (non-AT state) Function for executing the processing of S1709),
In the case of a continuous lottery opportunity, a continuous lottery process is performed to execute a continuous lottery process as to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
Probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning the continuation winning under the condition that the continuation of the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state occurs at least one function (function of executing steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, since the advantageous gaming state is linked when the continuous lottery process results in the continuous win, the player will play the game while expecting the continuous lottery process to result in the continuous win. The interest of the game is improved.

In this case, when the advantageous game state is continuous, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process can be improved. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is extended, the extended holiday is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the advantageous gaming state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player when the advantageous gaming state is in a row. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, characterized in that the probability improving means increases the probability of becoming the continuous winning under at least one condition that the continuous winning is performed in the continuous lottery processing.

According to the feature D2, since the continuous lottery process results in the continuous win, the probability of the continuous win increases. As a result, the player's attention level is raised with respect to whether or not a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery processing.

Feature D3. The probability improving means,
Probability lottery execution means (function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the continuation probability lottery process, with at least one condition that the continuation lottery process has resulted in continuous winning,
Probability setting means (function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for increasing the probability of continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine described in the feature D2, which is provided with.

According to the feature D3, in order to set a high probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery processing, a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery processing, and a high probability of continuous winning in the continuous probability lottery processing is set. Must be the result for. This increases the degree of freedom in setting the probability that the probability of continuous winning is set to be high.

Feature D4. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (AT state before branch) and a second advantageous period (branch AT state) that follows thereafter.
The continuous lottery executing means executes the continuous lottery process when the first advantageous period ends,
In the gaming machine, the effect execution means (image display device 66) performs an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period. The production control means to be executed (function of executing the process of step S1109 in the sub-side MPU 82) is provided,
When a specific effect (winning effect) is executed as the advantageous period effect, there is a possibility that the probability of becoming the continuous winning is increased or the probability of becoming the continuous winning is increased by the probability improving means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, which is higher than when an effect is executed.

According to the characteristic D4, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous game state is executed, the advantageous game state is linked. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not it is an effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the specific effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the probability of continuous winning is high or high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the specific effect to be generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D5. The effect control means,
Production lottery execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the production content lottery process when the continuation lottery process results in continuous winning;
Specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting the specific effect as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process,
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Equipped with
The probability improving means,
Probability lottery execution means (function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes a continuation probability lottery process when the specific production is set as the production that is executed in the second advantageous period,
Probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for improving the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process,
The gaming machine described in the feature D4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D5, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the consecutive game game in the advantageous game state is determined, so that the player expects the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. A game will be played. Further, when a specific effect is executed out of these specific effects and predetermined effects, there is a possibility that the continuous lottery process has a high probability of being continuously won. Therefore, the player further executes the specific effects. You will be playing while expecting that. As a result, the player's expectation can be made multi-tiered, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D6. In the feature D4 or D5, the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the highest probability when the number of times the particular effect is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Game machine.

According to the characteristic D6, since the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of times, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process becomes the highest probability, and thus the player's expectation that the specific effect is executed. Can be increased.

It should be noted that there may be a configuration in which there are three or more types of probabilities of continuous winning.

Feature D7. A special storage means (a privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the number of remaining executions in the advantageous game state,
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the remaining number of executions of 1 or more, a new execution number of the advantageous game state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6.

According to the characteristic D7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process when the game is in the advantageous game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being connected more than necessary, as compared with a configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation lottery process causes a continuation failure.

Feature D8. When the new execution times of the advantageous game state are started by the information stored in the specific storage means being information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the probability improving means determines that the winning is continued. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the setting for increasing the probability of becoming is not performed.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to prevent the chance of being set to a high probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery processing from being set more than necessary.

Feature D9. If the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the memory executing means (step S2005, step S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , A function of executing the processing of steps S2011 and S2504),
In the case of the judgment trigger, it is judged whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82). And a function for executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
A configuration in which when the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. And
Even when the continuation lottery process causes a continuation discontinuity, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent continuation discontinuation period and information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. In the case where it becomes, characteristic D7 or D8 characterized by having an advantageous continuation means (a function for executing the setting process of the AT state before branch in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution time of the advantageous game state The game machine described.

According to the characteristic D9, even if the privilege numerical value information is not the information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more before the determination trigger, the privilege numerical value becomes the privilege reference numerical value or more in the period after the continuation failure. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is linked. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to make the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information larger before the judgment triggers. Therefore, the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment triggers. The game will be played while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is executed a plurality of times, and the game according to any one of features D1 to D9. Machine.

With the gaming machine having the feature D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature D11. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
The gaming machine is
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature D10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

With the gaming machine having the feature D11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Advantageous transition means (step S1614 to step S1617 in the sub-side MPU 82 and step S1706 to step in the sub-side MPU 82) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (normal AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined game state (non-AT state) Function for executing the processing of S1709),
In the case of a continuous lottery opportunity, a continuous lottery process is performed to execute a continuous lottery process as to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
Specific storage means (privilege point counter of sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the number of remaining executions in the advantageous game state,
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the number of remaining executions of 1 or more, or when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started. Advantageous continuation means (a function for executing the setting processing of the pre-branching AT state in the sub-side MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic E1, not only the advantageous game state is continued when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, but the information stored in the specific storage means has a remaining execution count of 1 or more. Even in the case of the information that has been played, the advantageous game state is linked. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the advantageous game state is extended, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous game state to be extended. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. Probability improving means for increasing the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery processing when the number of times of execution of the advantageous game state is repeated and the probability improving condition is satisfied (the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82 is executed. The gaming machine described in the feature E1 having the function of

According to the characteristic E2, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process can be improved by the advantageous game states being linked together. That is, the higher the number of remaining executions is set and the more advantageous gaming states are connected, the higher the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is extended, the extended holiday is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the advantageous gaming state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling of the player when the advantageous gaming state is in a row. In addition, it is possible to closely associate the extended game in the advantageous game state related to the number of remaining runs and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting both extended game modes becomes synergistic. It becomes possible to do.

Feature E3. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (AT state before branch) and a second advantageous period (branch AT state) that follows thereafter.
When the first advantageous period ends, the advantageous continuation unit determines whether or not the information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, or the continuous lottery process. It is to determine whether or not it has been continuously elected,
In the gaming machine, the effect execution means (image display device 66) performs an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period. The production control means to be executed (function of executing the process of step S1109 in the sub-side MPU 82) is provided,
The effect control means,
An effect lottery execution means (function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes an effect content lottery process when new execution times of the advantageous game state are continuously executed,
Specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a specific effect (winning effect) as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process,
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Equipped with
The gaming machine, when the number of times the particular effect has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times of execution, a probability improving means for increasing the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process (the process of step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82). The game machine according to the feature E1 or E2, which is provided with a function to execute.

According to the characteristic E3, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously performed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous game state is executed, the advantageous game state is linked. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not it is an effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the extended game state of the advantageous game state is determined, so the player should play the game while expecting the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. Becomes Further, since the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of times, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is increased, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the specific effect is executed. Become.

Further, since the specific effect is executed even when the advantageous game state is continued because the remaining execution number is 1 or more, the larger the number of remaining execution times is set, the predetermined execution number of the specific effect is executed. The degree of expectation that is the number of times is increased. Therefore, if a large number is set as the remaining execution count, not only the benefit that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state increases, but also the benefit that the probability of continuous winning increases is increased. The advantage that a large number of times is set as the remaining number of executions is enhanced.

Feature E4. The game according to the feature E3, which is provided with an execution count notification unit (a function for executing the process of step S2205 in the winning count notification unit 69 and the sub-side MPU 82) that notifies the number of times the specific effect has been executed. Machine.

According to the characteristic E4, it is possible to preferably increase the expectation that the number of times of execution of the specific effect is the predetermined number of times of execution.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, characterized in that the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the highest probability.

According to the feature E5, the advantage that the advantageous game state is continuous is increased.

Feature E6. Any of the features E1 to E5 characterized by including a remaining number correspondence notifying unit (a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the stock side notification unit 68 and the sub-side MPU 82) that notifies the information corresponding to the remaining number of executions. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to recognize at least to what extent the advantageous game state is connected through the remaining number correspondence notifying means, and it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority.

In particular, when the configuration of the characteristic E3 is provided, the player himself/herself has the expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will be the predetermined number of executions, in relation to the number of remaining executions grasped by the remaining number correspondence notifying means It becomes possible to recognize. As a result, it is possible to closely associate the advantageous game state related villa related to the number of remaining runs and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting both villa modes is synergistic. It becomes possible.

Feature E7. When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the remaining execution count of 1 or more, the advantageous continuation means does not execute the continuous lottery processing and newly executes the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, wherein the gaming machine is started.

According to the characteristic E7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery processing when the game is in the advantageous game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from being connected more than necessary, as compared with a configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation lottery process causes a continuation failure.

Feature E8. If the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the memory executing means (step S2005, step S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) for storing the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , A function of executing the processing of steps S2011 and S2504),
In the case of the judgment trigger, it is judged whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82). And a function for executing the process of step S2609),
Equipped with
The advantageous continuation means newly executes the advantageous gaming state without executing the continuous lottery process when the privilege reference determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. Even if the continuation lottery process causes the number of times to start, even if the continuation lottery process causes a continuation discontinuation, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent continuation discontinuation period. The game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7, characterized in that, when is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started. ..

According to the characteristic E8, even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value until the determination trigger, the privilege numerical value information becomes equal to or more than the privilege standard numerical value in the period after the continuation failure. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is linked. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to make the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information larger before the judgment triggers. Therefore, the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment triggers. The game will be played while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature E9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is executed a plurality of times, and the game according to any one of features E1 to E8. Machine.

With the gaming machine having the feature E9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature E10. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
The gaming machine is
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

With the gaming machine having the characteristic E10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. When the privilege numerical value condition is met (the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege executing unit (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) stores the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) in the storage executing unit (sub). Function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the side MPU 82),
In the case of the judgment trigger, it is judged whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82). And a function for executing the processing of step S2609),
Predetermined privilege granting means (step in sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player when the privilege standard determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. A function of making an affirmative decision in S2301 to execute the subsequent processing and a function of making an affirmative decision in step S2609 of the sub-side MPU 82 to execute the subsequent processing),
Granting lottery executing means (sub-side) for executing a granting lottery process of whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege when the privilege criterion determining means does not determine that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. A function of executing the process of step S2907 in the MPU 82),
Equipped with
The award lottery executing means executes the award lottery process such that the probability of being awarded in the award lottery process differs according to the award numerical value information of the award storage means. Machine.

According to the characteristic F1, since the privilege numerical value information stored when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied becomes the information corresponding to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player has the privilege numerical value condition. The game is played while expecting to be established, and the game is performed while expecting that the privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, even if the information is not information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value, the predetermined privilege is granted by being awarded in the grant lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the form in which the predetermined privilege is given, and it is possible to give many opportunities to give the predetermined privilege.

Furthermore, the grant lottery process is executed so that the probability of winning the prize varies depending on the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information. As a result, even if the privilege numerical value information is information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value, the privilege numerical value information affects the probability of being awarded in the grant lottery process. Can be increased.

From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The award lottery execution means performs the award lottery process such that the probability that the award win is higher in the award lottery process is higher when the value corresponding to the award value information in the award storage means is larger than when the value is small. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 characterized by performing the following.

According to the feature F2, even if the privilege numerical value information is information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value, the larger the privilege numerical value information, the higher the probability of being awarded in the grant lottery process. As a result, even if the privilege numerical value information is not information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the privilege numerical value information.

Feature F3. In the case where a prize is won in the grant lottery process and the predetermined privilege is granted, an erasing unit (a function of executing the process of step S2911 in the sub-side MPU 82) for erasing the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storing unit is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to limit the profit caused by the privilege numerical value information to some extent.

Feature F4. The privilege numerical condition is configured to be satisfied in a game state (normal AT state) corresponding to the privilege,
It is a configuration in which one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege ends after the determination trigger is given,
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the privilege numerical value information of the privilege storage means can be taken over if the grant lottery process is not executed or if the grant lottery process does not result in a win.

According to the feature F4, the privilege numerical value information can be inherited when the grant lottery process is not executed or when the grant lottery process does not result in the grant win. Therefore, the privilege numerical value information is related to the grant lottery process. Diversification of hand-over modes. As a result, the mode of progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege numerical value information, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature F5. The privilege numerical value condition is configured to be satisfied in an advantageous game state (normal AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (non-AT state),
The predetermined privilege is that the advantageous gaming state continues,
Features F1 to F4 characterized by including a unit (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) for ending the advantageous game state when the prize is not won in the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature F5, the grant lottery process is present as a final opportunity to generate the advantageous game state condominium, and the degree of attention to the grant lottery process is increased. Further, even if the privilege numerical value information is acquired immediately before the end of the advantageous gaming state by referring to the privilege numerical value information in the granted lottery process that exists as the final opportunity to generate the advantageous gaming state condominium It is possible to benefit from it. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the satisfaction of the privilege numerical value condition at any timing of the advantageous game state.

Feature F6. In the case of a continuous lottery opportunity, a continuous lottery process is performed to execute a continuous lottery process as to whether or not a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
When it is determined by the privilege criterion determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value, a new execution number of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. Yes,
The gaming machine according to Feature F5, characterized in that the grant lottery execution means executes the grant lottery process after the continuation lottery process causes a continuation failure.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the advantageous game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature F7. Even when the continuation lottery process causes a continuation discontinuity, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent continuation discontinuation period and information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. When it becomes, the game machine according to the feature F6, characterized in that a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started.

According to the characteristic F7, even if the privilege numerical value information is not the value corresponding to the value of the privilege reference value or more by the time of the determination trigger, the privilege value information becomes the value of the privilege reference value or more in the period after the continuation failure. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is linked. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to make the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information larger before the judgment triggers. Therefore, the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment triggers. The game will be played while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature F8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
The award lottery executing means is configured so that the award winning probability differs depending on not only the value corresponding to the award numerical value information of the award storing means but also the result of the hand lottery process or the winning result in the corresponding game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the lottery process is executed.

According to the feature F8, not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information, but also the winning combination or the winning result in the corresponding game influences the probability of being awarded in the grant lottery process. As a result, the points to be noticed in executing the granted lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature F9. When the result of the winning combination lottery process in the relevant game is a specific winning combination or when a specific winning combination has occurred and the winning combination has not been achieved in the awarding drawing process, the awarding lottery process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F8, characterized in that it is provided with means for increasing the number of continuous games in the state (function of making an affirmative decision in step S2912 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature F9, the number of continuous games in the state in which the grant lottery process is executed can be increased even if the grant lottery process does not result in the grant win even though the particular prize has been won or the particular prize has been won. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling when the special lottery or the special prize is won but the special lottery process does not result in the special lottery.

Feature F10. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
Characteristic F1 characterized in that the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of F9 to F9.

With the gaming machine having the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature F11. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
The gaming machine is
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to Feature F10, wherein the predetermined privilege enables execution of a game in a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination corresponds to the order.

With the gaming machine having the feature F11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process (function for executing the lottery process in the main MPU 72),
A winning-correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning-correspondence privilege corresponding to a winning combination in the winning combination lottery process;
At least one condition is that a predetermined winning combination (normal replay winning combination) has been won in the winning combination lottery processing in the expected transitional status (transitional opportunity status) Advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a high advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) (function of executing the processing of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82),
Expecting to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the transition expected state, at least one condition being that another role (expectation degree improving role) is won in the role lottery process in the transition expected state. Degree improving means (function of executing the processing of steps S1605 and S1606 in the sub-side MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, the transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur by the predetermined winning combination being won in the transition expected state. As a result, a game is played while expecting a predetermined winning combination in the transition expected state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if the winning combination is won in the transition expected state, the expectation that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the transition expected state increases, so the player may win not only the predetermined role but also another role in the transition expected state. It is expected, and the role of expecting a win is diversified. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features G2. The game according to the feature G1, wherein the expectation improving means extends the duration of the transition expected state under at least one condition that the other winning combination has been won in the role lottery process. Machine.

According to the characteristic G2, when the winning combination is won, the duration of the transition expected state can be extended, so that it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs.

Features G3. In the expected transition state, a transition lottery execution means (a function for executing the process of step S1609 in the sub-side MPU 82) that executes the transition lottery process when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process,
The advantageous shift means shifts the game state to the advantageous game state when a shift win is obtained in the shift lottery process,
A feature G1 characterized in that the expectation improving means increases the probability of being a transition win in the transition lottery process on the condition that at least one of the different wins has been won in the role lottery process. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in G2.

According to the characteristic G3, when a different winning combination is obtained, the probability of being selected as a transition winning in the transition lottery process can be increased, so that it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs.

Features G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein at least the probability of winning the predetermined winning combination in the expected transition state is higher than the probability of winning the different winning combination.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning the predetermined winning combination in the transition expected state, and it is possible to give many opportunities to expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state. In general, when a winning combination with a low winning probability is won, a situation that is advantageous to the player may occur. However, the winning combination having the configuration of the above characteristic G1 has a winning probability lower than that of the predetermined winning combination. When the player wins, the degree of expectation of the transition to the advantageous game state increases, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when another winning combination is won.

Features G5. The predetermined combination is a grant trigger for the advantageous game state in the transition expected state, but is not a grant trigger for the other advantageous game states, according to any one of features G1 to G4. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic G5, it is possible to increase the degree of attention that the predetermined winning combination is won in the transition expected state.

Features G6. The different combination does not become a grant trigger of the advantageous game state in the transition expected state, but becomes a grant trigger of the advantageous game state in other game states, The game according to any one of features G1 to G5 Machine.

According to the characteristic G6, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the different combination is an advantageous combination, and it is possible to increase the attention to the fact that the different combination is won.

Features G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the winning-correspondence granting means grants a predetermined winning-correspondence privilege when the predetermined winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process.

According to the characteristic G7, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage when a predetermined winning combination is achieved, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning a predetermined winning combination.

Features G8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, when the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed, the winning-correspondence granting means grants the winning-correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristic features G1 to G7.

With the gaming machine having the feature G8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Features G9. Characteristic G8 characterized in that, if the predetermined winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, a winning is generated irrespective of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic G9, when the predetermined winning combination is won, a prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated irrespective of the operation timing of the stop operation means, so it is clear to the player that an opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state has occurred. It becomes possible to recognize.

Feature G10. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
As the winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery process, an order-corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning) that allows winning to be generated when variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display sections is stopped in a predetermined order. Role) exists,
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or G9, wherein the advantageous game state is a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is won.

With the gaming machine having the feature G10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
A special waiting period (start wait time) for waiting the progress of the game when a special event occurs in which the part lottery process is a special lottery result and the stop result of the pattern is a special stop result And a special standby period setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S805 to S806, steps S812 to S813, and steps S906 to S907 in the main MPU 72).
When the special event occurs in the standby avoidance situation (the penalty situation when the value of the bonus AT counter is 1 or more), the special standby period setting means is set not to set the special standby period, or Standby avoiding means for setting a waiting period shorter than the special waiting period (a function of making a positive determination in step S804 in the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S811, and a negative determination in step S901) Function, a function of making a negative determination in step S902, and a function of making a positive determination in step S905),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, the special waiting period is set when the special event that is either the winning of the special role or the winning of the special role occurs, thereby emphasizing that the special event occurs through the setting of the special waiting period. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the player feels unexpected that the special waiting period has been set, and enhances the excitement of the occurrence of the special event. On the other hand, when the special waiting period is set, the progress of the game is on standby, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. On the other hand, in such a situation, the special waiting period is not set or the waiting period is shortened, so that the special waiting period can be generated in a preferable situation. From the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features H2. The special standby period setting means, the measurement of the special standby period is started after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the pattern during the special standby period.

According to the characteristic H2, when the special waiting period is set, the start of variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special waiting period is set. .. On the other hand, if the special standby period is set in an unfavorable situation, the variable display of the pattern is not started even though the game is about to be started, which may be annoying. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by preventing the special waiting period from being set or shortening the waiting period.

Features H3. It is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing the processing of step S1109 and step S1206 in the sub-side MPU 82) that causes the effect execution means to execute the special event response effect during the special standby period. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2.

According to the feature H3, since the special event response effect is executed during the special standby period, it is possible to enhance the feeling of uplifting that the special event has occurred. On the other hand, if a special waiting period is set and a special event response effect is executed in an unfavorable situation, the player may feel uncomfortable, but in such a situation, the special waiting period is not set. By turning on or shortening the waiting period, the special event response effect is not executed.

Features H4. When the special event occurs in a predetermined game state (non-AT state), advantageous transition means (mainly a transition mode) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (bonus AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than the predetermined game state The side MPU 72 has a function of executing steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904).
When the special event occurs in the advantageous game state, the number of executions of the advantageous game state may increase, or the number of continuous games in the advantageous game state may increase.
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the standby avoidance situation is a situation in which the advantageous game state is set.

According to the characteristic H4, the special waiting period is set for the occurrence of the special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, so that the special waiting period is emphasized as the transition to the advantageous gaming state and as the break of the gaming state. Is present, and an effect of enhancing the player's uplifting feeling can be achieved. On the other hand, in the advantageous game state, the player's consciousness is focused on digesting the game, so if a special waiting period is set for the occurrence of a special event in the middle of the game, it may be annoying to the player. There is a nature. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by preventing the special waiting period from being set or shortening the waiting period.

Features H5. When the special event occurs in a predetermined game state (non-AT state), advantageous transition means (mainly a transition mode) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (bonus AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than the predetermined game state Function of executing the processing of step S802 to step S803, step S809 to step S810, and step S903 to step S904 in the side MPU 72),
When the special event occurs in the penalty situation, transition restriction means for restricting the transition of the game state to the advantageous game state by the advantageous transition means (a function of making a negative determination in step S901 in the main MPU 72) , And the function of making a negative determination in step S902),
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the standby avoidance situation is the penalty situation.

According to the characteristic H5, the special waiting period is set for the occurrence of the special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, so that the special waiting period is emphasized as the transition to the advantageous gaming state and as a break of the gaming state. Is present, and an effect of enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player can be achieved. On the other hand, even if a special event occurs in the penalty situation, the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur, so if the special standby period is set in such a situation, the player may feel uncomfortable. .. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by preventing the special waiting period from being set or shortening the waiting period.

Features H6. As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

With the gaming machine having the feature H6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Features H7. In the case where the special lottery result is obtained, a pre-start waiting period setting means (in the main MPU 72) that causes the variable display of the pattern to wait until the pre-start waiting period (first freeze time, second freeze time) in the game has elapsed A function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S408),
Any one of features H1 to H6 characterized in that the pre-start standby period setting means sets the pre-start standby period when the special lottery result is obtained even in the standby avoidance situation. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature H7, when the special lottery result is obtained, the pre-start waiting period is set in the game, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special lottery result has been obtained. As a result, the player can feel a surprise about the setting of the pre-start waiting period and can raise the mood, and perform the stop operation of the game while recognizing that it is the special lottery result. Is possible. In addition, such a function of the pre-start waiting period may occur regardless of whether or not it is in the standby avoidance situation. Therefore, even in the standby avoidance situation, by setting the pre-start standby period, the function is appropriately generated. It becomes possible.

For the configurations of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features I1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, the characteristic E group, the characteristic F group, the characteristic G group, and the characteristic H group can solve the following problems. Is.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Specifically, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the state where the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display parts (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop the variable display of the picture on the corresponding variable display portion;
Variable display of the picture is started in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) so that the variable display of the pattern in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery process, when a winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, a specified winning combination is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of patterns on each of the variable display sections (normal replay winning combination ) Exists,
A first control unit (main side MPU 72) having the variable display control unit, and a second control unit (sub side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit are provided. ,
The first control means is
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of patterns on each variable display unit should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function of executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72). When,
Order specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the correct order event in which the variable display of the patterns on each of the variable display sections is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means (executes the normal replay pressing order determining process in the main MPU 72) Function)
Equipped with
The second control means is
Order notification control means (function of executing the processing of step S1109 and step S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means,
Notification determining means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic I1, since not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

In this case, the first control means intentionally selects the order in which the variable display of the patterns should be stopped when the specified winning combination occurs in which the specified winning occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the patterns, and the second control is performed. In the means, control for making the selection order information notified is executed as necessary. Then, the first control means specifies whether or not the selected order and the actual stop order match. As a result, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state is not required from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the order selecting means always selects the order when the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process.

According to the characteristic I2, when the specified winning combination is won, the order is always selected so that it is not necessary to switch between the situation where the order is selected and the situation where the order is not selected. Can be simplified.

Feature I3. The second control means manages the progress of an advantageous game state (normal AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined game state (non-AT state), and executes progress processing means (processing during AT in the sub-side MPU 82). Function)
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the characteristic I3, since the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic I1 described above, information from the second control means to the first control means is obtained even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means. It becomes possible for the first control means to grasp the progress of the advantageous game state without the need to transmit.

Feature I4. When the continuation condition of the advantageous game state is satisfied, the progress management means sets a continuation setting so that a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of setting the pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82 and the process of step S2909 to step S2911),
Characteristic I3 characterized in that the notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information in a situation where the continuation setting means continues to execute the advantageous game state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic I4, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to grasp the occurrence of a state-of-the-art condominium.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the specified winning combination is a winning combination that has the highest probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress status of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means, and when the progress status of the advantageous gaming state is changed, the first control means can quickly recognize it. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature I6. As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the advantageous game state is a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

According to the characteristic I6, it is possible to surely generate the order corresponding winning combination in the advantageous game state, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature I7. The first control means performs specific output setting means (step S3112 and step in the MPU 72 on the main side) for performing specific output setting based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified by the order specifying means. The game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I6, which is provided with a function of executing the process of S3404).

According to feature I7, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the game state, the game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to set the external output corresponding to the state of progress in the first control means.

Feature I8. Characteristic I7 characterized in that the specific output setting means sets the external output corresponding to the specific output based on the fact that the correct sequence event has occurred a plurality of times specified by the sequence specifying means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature I8, the possibility that the specific output of the external output is set when the correct sequence event happens to occur is reduced.

Feature I9. The specific output setting means determines that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order specifying means without the occurrence of the event that the correct order event does not occur when the winning combination is won. The game machine according to feature I8, wherein the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact.

According to the feature I9, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the specific output of the external output is set when the correct sequence event occurs by accident.

Feature I10. The second control means notifies different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selecting means (different order notification control means (processing of steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82). The game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I9.

According to the characteristic I10, it is possible to positively prevent the occurrence of the correct sequence event by chance, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means.

Feature I11. The second control means manages the progress of an advantageous game state (normal AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined game state (non-AT state), and executes progress processing means (processing during AT in the sub-side MPU 82). Function)
The notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine according to Feature I10, wherein the out-of-order notification control unit is configured to notify the out-of-order information according to a progress status of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the characteristic I11, since the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advance of the advantageous game state is not required without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature I12. When the continuation condition of the advantageous game state is satisfied, the progress management means sets a continuation setting so that a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of setting the pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82 and the process of step S2909 to step S2911),
The notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information when the execution times of the advantageous game state are continued by the continuation setting means,
The out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information in a situation different from a situation in which the execution times of the advantageous game state are continued by the continuation setting means. The game machine according to feature I11.

According to the characteristic I12, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of a state-run condominium.

Feature I13. The first control means executes specific response processing based on the fact that the correct sequence event has occurred a plurality of times by the order identification means (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute the process of
The second control unit includes a second side order specifying unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub MPU 82) that specifies that the correct order event has occurred,
The out-of-order notification control unit is configured to notify the out-of-order information based on the fact that the correct-sequence event has been specified by the second-side order specification unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features I10 to I12.

According to the characteristic I13, the first control means executes the specific response process when the correct-sequence event occurs a plurality of times, so that the specific-response process may be performed when the correct sequence event occurs by accident. Will be reduced. Further, the second control means executes the out-of-order notification when a correct-sequence event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being executed more than necessary.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein when the winning combination is won, a prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of the stop operating means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. ..

According to the characteristic I14, by intentionally selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the so-called missed specified role is won, the player's profit depends on whether or not the selection order information is notified. It does not fluctuate. As a result, it is unlikely that there will be a restriction in notifying the selection order information.

Feature I15. As the plurality of variable display units, a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R) are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14, wherein the order selecting means does not select an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

According to Feature I15, since the player generally stops the left variable display unit first, by preventing the player from selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit, the correct sequence event occurs accidentally. It is possible to reduce the possibility that

Feature I16. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I15, wherein the defined role is a re-gaming role.

According to the feature I16, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects by using the replay combination.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features I1 to I16, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display parts (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop the variable display of the picture on the corresponding variable display portion;
Variable display of the picture is started in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) so that the variable display of the pattern in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery process, when a winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, a specified winning combination is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of patterns on each of the variable display sections (normal replay winning combination ) Exists,
A first control unit (main side MPU 72) having the variable display control unit, and a second control unit (sub side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit are provided. ,
The first control means is
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of patterns on each variable display unit should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function of executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72). When,
Order specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the correct order event in which the variable display of the patterns on each of the variable display sections is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means (executes the normal replay pressing order determining process in the main MPU 72) Function)
Equipped with
The second control means is
Order notification control means (function of executing the processing of step S1109 and step S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means,
An out-of-order notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82) for informing the out-of-order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selecting means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, not only the first control unit but also the second control unit is provided as the control unit, so that the processing load of the first control unit can be reduced.

In this case, the first control means intentionally selects the order in which the variable display of the patterns should be stopped when the specified winning combination in which the specified winning occurs occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the patterns. The second control means may notify the selected order or may notify a different order from the selected order. Then, the first control means specifies whether or not the selected order and the actual stop order match. As a result, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state is not required from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

In particular, by reporting the different order information, it is possible to positively prevent accidental occurrence of the correct order event, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means. Become.

As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Features J2. The second control means manages the progress of an advantageous game state (normal AT state) in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined game state (non-AT state), and executes progress processing means (processing during AT in the sub-side MPU 82). Function)
The order notification control means is to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information according to a progress status of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature J2, since the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress status of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advance of the advantageous game state is not required without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Features J3. When the continuation condition of the advantageous game state is satisfied, the progress management means sets a continuation setting so that a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of setting the pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82 and the process of step S2909 to step S2911),
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information when the execution times of the advantageous game state are continued by the continuation setting means,
The out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information in a situation different from the situation in which the execution times of the advantageous game state are continued by the continuation setting means. A game machine according to feature J2.

According to the feature J3, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of a state-run condominium.

Features J4. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein the specified winning combination is a winning combination that has a highest probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress status of the advantageous gaming state in the first control means, and when the progress status of the advantageous gaming state is changed, the first control means can quickly recognize it. It becomes possible to grasp.

Features J5. As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

According to the feature J5, it is possible to surely generate the order corresponding winning combination in the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

Features J6. The first control means executes specific response processing based on the fact that the correct sequence event has occurred a plurality of times by the order identification means (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute the process of
The second control unit includes a second side order specifying unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub MPU 82) that specifies that the correct order event has occurred,
The out-of-order notification control unit is configured to notify the out-of-order information based on the fact that the correct-sequence event has been specified by the second-side order specification unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

According to the feature J6, since the first control means executes the specific response process when the correct-sequence event occurs a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the specific-response process will be performed when the correct sequence event occurs by accident. Will be reduced. Further, the second control means executes the out-of-order notification when a correct-sequence event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being executed more than necessary.

Features J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process.

According to the feature J7, in the case where the winning combination is won, the order is always selected so that the second control means can independently manage the progress of the gaming state You don't need to change Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Features J8. The first control means performs specific output setting means (step S3112 and step in the MPU 72 on the main side) for performing specific output setting based on the fact that the correct order event has been specified by the order specifying means. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of S3404.

According to the feature J8, even if the second control means is configured to independently manage the progress of the game state, the game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to set the external output corresponding to the state of progress in the first control means.

Features J9. Characteristic J8, characterized in that the specific output setting means sets the external output corresponding to the specific output based on the fact that the correct sequence event has been specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J9, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the specific output of the external output is set when the correct sequence event happens to occur.

Features J10. The specific output setting means determines that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order specifying means without the occurrence of the event that the correct order event does not occur when the winning combination is won. The game machine according to feature J9, wherein the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact.

According to the feature J10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed when the correct sequence event occurs by chance.

Feature J11. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, wherein when the winning combination is won, a prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of the stop operating means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. ..

According to the feature J11, by intentionally selecting the order in which the variable display of the patterns should be stopped when the so-called missed specified role is won, the player's profit depends on whether or not the selection order information is notified. It does not fluctuate. As a result, it is unlikely that there will be a restriction in notifying the selection order information.

Features J12. As the plurality of variable display units, a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R) are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the order selection means does not select an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

According to Feature J12, since the player generally stops the left variable display unit first, by preventing the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit, the correct sequence event occurs accidentally. It is possible to reduce the possibility that

Features J13. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the defined role is a re-gaming role.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to achieve the above-described operational effects by using the re-game combination.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A first control means (main side MPU 72) and a second control means (sub side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The second control means is
Informing control means (in the sub-side MPU 82) for making an announcement that the privilege can be given to the player in each of the first advantageous game state (bonus AT state) and the second advantageous game state (normal AT state) A function of executing the processing of steps S1109 and S1806),
A second side ending means (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) for ending the second advantageous game state when the condition for ending the second advantageous game state is satisfied;
Equipped with
The first control means has a first side termination means (a function of executing the process of step S1009 in the main MPU 72) that terminates the first advantageous game state when the termination condition of the first advantageous game state is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

According to the characteristic K1, since not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In addition, in the configuration in which the advantageous game state is diversified, since the second control means notifies the player that the privilege can be given in each of the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state. The processing load of the first control means can be reduced.

In this case, the determination of the termination trigger of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state is not all performed by the second control means, but the determination of the termination timing of the first advantageous gaming state is performed by the first control means. Done. As a result, it is possible to perform special processing in the first control means in accordance with the progress of the first advantageous game state, and enhance the effect of the production while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It will be possible.

As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in the configuration in which the processing load of each control means is reduced.

Features K2. The first control means sets, according to the progress status of the first advantageous game state, a progress wait setting means for setting a progress wait period (end wait time) for waiting the progress of the game in the game executing means (reel unit 31). (A function of executing the process of step S1011 in the main MPU 72) The gaming machine described in the feature K1.

According to the characteristic K2, the progress standby period is set according to the progress status of the first advantageous game state, so that the progression of the first advantageous game state is given while giving the player unexpectedness through the setting of the progress standby period. It is possible for the player to recognize the situation.

Features K3. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature K2, wherein the progress standby setting means sets the progress standby period in accordance with the progress status of the first advantageous game state to wait for the progress of the game.

According to the characteristic K3, the progress waiting period is set in accordance with the progress state of the first advantageous game state, whereby the progress of the game is waited. In this case, the player feels surprising that the game has been waited for, and knows that the progress waiting period is set, so that the player can know the progress of the first advantageous game state. Become.

Features K4. The progress standby setting means causes the measurement of the progress standby period to start after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the variable display control means waits for start of variable display of the pattern during the progress standby period.

According to the characteristic K4, when the progress waiting period is set, the start of variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the progress waiting period is set. ..

Features K5. The game according to the characteristic K4, which is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 and S1208 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the processing corresponding to the progress standby during the progress standby period. Machine.

According to the characteristic K5, it is possible to execute an effect according to the progress status of the first advantageous gaming state, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Features K6. Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process (function for executing the lottery process in the main MPU 72),
A winning-correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning-correspondence privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the winning combination lottery process occurs.
Equipped with
At least the first control means determines that the correspondence result, which is one of the result of the winning combination lottery process and the result of the winning, is the first correspondence result (first to third special replay winning combination, result of failure). As one condition, a first result correspondence shifting means for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state (function of executing the processing of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72) ),
The second control means is
Second result correspondence shift means (step S1614 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the game state to the second advantageous game state on the condition that the correspondence result becomes the second correspondence result (normal replay combination winning) A function of executing the processing of step S1617),
Event response transition means for transitioning the game state to the second advantageous game state on the condition that an event different from the response result has become a response event (executes the processing of steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82) Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that

According to the characteristic K6, the transition pattern is different between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, so that the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, the transition pattern of the second advantageous gaming state is made more complicated than the transition pattern of the first advantageous gaming state, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means and diversifying the game. It becomes possible.

Features K7. The first control means starts a new execution time of the first advantageous game state based on the satisfaction of a first continuation condition when one execution time of the first advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of executing the process of step S219 in the main MPU 72),
The second control means starts a new execution time of the second advantageous game state based on the fact that the second continuation condition is satisfied when one execution time of the second advantageous game state is completed. Means (function of executing the setting process of the pre-branching AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 and the process of steps S2909 to S2911),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein there are more patterns that satisfy the second continuation condition than patterns that satisfy the first continuation condition.

According to the characteristic K7, by differentiating the continuation condition establishment pattern between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, since the continuation condition establishment pattern for the second advantageous gaming state is more than the continuation condition establishment pattern for the first advantageous gaming state, the game is performed while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible to diversify.

Features K8. The second control means is
When the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state (the privilege point is selected in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) is stored in the privilege storage means (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84). Storage execution means for storing (a function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, step S2011, and step S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82),
In the case of the judgment trigger, it is judged whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82). And a function for executing the processing of step S2609),
Equipped with
Features K1 to K7 characterized in that, when the privilege reference determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, a new execution time of the second advantageous gaming state is started. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic K8, since the privilege numerical value information stored when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state becomes the information corresponding to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value, the second advantageous gaming state is continued. In the second advantageous gaming state, the player plays the game while expecting that the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, and at the same time expecting that the privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or higher than the privilege reference numerical value. Becomes As a result, the interest of the game is improved. In this case, the continuation setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the privilege numerical value information is performed by the second control means, so that the interest of the game can be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Features K9. In the case of the continuous lottery trigger, the second control means determines whether or not to start a new execution time of the advantageous game state after one execution time of the advantageous game state is finished. A continuous lottery executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the process is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K8, characterized in that when a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, a new execution time of the second advantageous game state is started.

According to the characteristic K9, when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, the second advantageous game state is linked, so the player plays while expecting to be continuously won in the second advantageous game state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuation setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the continuous lottery process is performed by the second control means, so that the interest of the game can be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Is possible.

Features K10. Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process (function for executing the lottery process in the main MPU 72),
A winning-correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning-correspondence privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the winning combination lottery process occurs.
Equipped with
The first control means carries out the remaining execution of the first advantageous game state on condition that the correspondence result which is one of the result of the winning combination lottery process and the result of the winning is the first correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, which is provided with a number setting means for setting the number of times (a function of executing the processes of step S803, step S810, and step S904 in the main MPU 72).

According to the characteristic K10, the first advantageous game state can be extended, so that the player can play while expecting the extended advantage state in the first advantageous game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the number of remaining executions of the first advantageous game state is set in relation to the result of the winning lottery process or the result of winning, the interest of the game is improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It is possible to plan.

Features K11. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display portions for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop the variable display of the picture on the corresponding variable display portion;
Variable display of the picture is started in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) so that the variable display of the pattern in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state are game states in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is won, and any one of features K1 to K10 is described. Game machine.

With the gaming machine having the characteristics K11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features K1 to K11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the characteristic I group, the characteristic J group, and the characteristic K group can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Specifically, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the state where the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

In addition, in the slot machine, a configuration is known in which a production device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided in addition to the reel device, and the interest of the game is improved through the production performed by the production device. In addition, in the configuration in which the effect device is provided as described above, an effect control unit is provided separately from the main control unit that performs the lottery process and the drive control of the reel, and the effect control unit controls the effect device. Therefore, a configuration in which the processing load of the main control means is reduced is also known.

Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display portions for variably displaying the pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop the variable display of the picture on the corresponding variable display portion;
Variable display of the picture is started in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) so that the variable display of the pattern in FIG.
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, the winning-correspondence granting means for granting the winning-correspondence privilege to the player based on the display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (the winning judgment in the main MPU 72) Function to execute processing),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery process, an order matching winning combination (first bell winning combination and first bell winning combination that can generate an order corresponding winning combination when variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions is stopped in a predetermined order) 2 Bell) exists,
A first control means (main MPU 72) having the role lottery execution means and the variable display control means;
Second control means (sub-side MPU 82) that executes notification control so that the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is won in the advantageous game state (normal AT state),
Equipped with
The first control means is
A prize specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main MPU 72) for specifying whether or not the order corresponding winning occurs when the order corresponding winning combination is won;
First setting means for performing an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state, based on the fact that the winning order specifying means specifies that the order corresponding winning occurs when the winning order is won. A function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, since not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. Further, since the second control means performs the notification control in a predetermined order in the advantageous game state, the processing load of the first control means is reduced in the configuration in which the interest of the game is improved by setting the advantageous game state. Be done.

In this case, the first control means performs an external output setting indicating that it is in the advantageous gaming state when it is specified that the order corresponding winning is generated when the order corresponding winning combination is won. As a result, even in the configuration in which the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed in the second control means, the advantageous game state is maintained without the need to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to set the external output indicating that.

From the above, it is possible to preferably perform the external output.

Feature L2. The first setting means is an external output setting that indicates the advantageous gaming state when the number of times that the order-corresponding winning has occurred is a specific number of times specified by the winning specifying means as a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to the feature L1, which is characterized by performing the following.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the external output setting indicating the advantageous game state is made when the order-based winning occurs by chance.

Feature L3. The first setting means does not specify that the order-corresponding winning has not occurred by the prize specifying means, and the number of times that the order-corresponding winning has been specified by the winning specifying means is plural times. The gaming machine according to the feature L2, wherein the external output setting indicating the advantageous game state is performed when a specific number of times defined as follows occurs.

According to the feature L3, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state is set when the order-based winning occurs by chance.

Feature L4. As the plurality of variable display units, a left variable display unit (left reel 32L), a middle variable display unit (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display unit (right reel 32R) are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the predetermined order does not include an order in which a first stop order is the left variable display section.

According to the feature L4, since the player generally stops the left variable display unit first, the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit is not included as the predetermined order, and thus the order-corresponding winning is accidental. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

Feature L5. A disadvantage that causes a disadvantageous phenomenon to the player based on the fact that the variable display of the picture on the variable display section different from the left side variable display section is first stopped in the predetermined game state which is not the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to feature L4, further including setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S1408 and step S1411 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature L5, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an order-corresponding prize is accidentally generated in the predetermined game state.

Feature L6. The first control means indicates that it is not in the advantageous game state based on the fact that the winning order specifying means specifies that the order corresponding winning does not occur when the order corresponding winning combination is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, which is provided with a second setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S3107 in the main MPU 72) that performs output setting.

According to the feature L6, whether or not the order-corresponding winning is generated both in the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state and in the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantage game state. Should be monitored. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature L7. The first setting means performs an external output setting that indicates the advantageous gaming state when the number of times that the order-corresponding winning has been identified by the prize identifying means is the first specified number of times. And
The second setting means sets an external output setting indicating that the advantageous game state is not established when the number of times that the prize specifying means determines that the order-corresponding winning has not occurred is the second specified number. Is what you do,
The gaming machine according to feature L6, wherein the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times are different.

According to the feature L7, it is monitored whether or not the order-corresponding winning has occurred in both the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state and the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantage game state. In such a configuration, it becomes possible to set the execution timing and accuracy of the external output setting according to the type of each external output setting.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the first specific number is larger than the second specific number.

According to the feature L8, it is possible to accurately perform the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state, while enabling the external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantageous game state at an early stage.

Feature L9. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein a plurality of winning combinations are included as the order corresponding winning combinations.

According to the feature L9, while increasing the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each winning combination, it is possible to set the external output corresponding to the advantageous game state at an early stage in the advantageous game state.

It should be noted that features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to the configurations of the features L1 to L9. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the characteristic L group can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Specifically, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the state where the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, the information is externally output in order to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize the state of the gaming machine, but it is still improved in order to suitably perform this external output. There is room.

<Feature M group>
Features M1. Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process (function for executing the lottery process in the main MPU 72),
A winning-correspondence granting unit (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for granting a winning-correspondence privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the winning combination lottery process occurs.
Equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance winning combination (CB winning combination) in which the winning state is maintained until the corresponding winning is generated.
The gaming machine is in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), with at least one condition that the winning maintenance role is in the winning state. A gaming machine characterized by having an advantageous shifting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the.

According to the feature M1, since the transition to the advantageous game state occurs when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state, it is possible to limit the period during which the transition to the advantageous game state is possible in relation to the winning combination. Become. As a result, the player pays attention to winning the winning maintenance role and maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance role. From the above, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

In addition, "a pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
The winning-correspondence granting means, when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, grants the winning-correspondence benefit as a winning occurrence,
Even if the winning maintenance role is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. It is possible to generate a prize corresponding to a winning combination and avoid it, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Features M2. Non-advantageous transition means (main side) for shifting to a non-advantageous gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end does not become larger than the number of game media of the player at the start when a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs The game machine described in the feature M1 having a function of executing the processes of steps S704 to S706 in the MPU 72.

According to the feature M2, when the winning state of the winning maintainer is achieved, when the prize is generated, the game is shifted to the non-advantageous game state, while by not generating the prize, the transition to the advantageous game state is generated. there's a possibility that. As a result, it is possible to make a great difference in the profit of the player depending on whether or not the winning maintenance winning combination is generated, and it is possible to increase the attention of the winning maintenance winning combination to the game in the winning state.

Features M3. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the non-advantageous game state is a game state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the start.

According to the feature M3, when a winning maintenance winning combination is generated, not only the opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state disappears but also the state shifts to the non-advantageous game state, but in the non-advantageous game state, the game medium Although the increase of is not expected, the decrease does not occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated a winning maintenance winning combination.

Features M4. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
The winning-correspondence granting means, when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, grants the winning-correspondence benefit as a winning occurrence,
The gaming machine described in the feature M2 or M3, wherein the non-advantageous game state is a game state that continues over a plurality of games.

According to the feature M4, it is possible to make a great difference in the profit of the player depending on whether or not the winning maintenance winning combination is generated, and it is possible to increase the attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintenance winning combination. ..

Features M5. It is provided with a winning notification means (a function for executing the processing of step S707 in the internal status notification unit 63 and the main MPU 72) for executing the winning status notification that the winning maintenance officer is in the winning status. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M4.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to urge the player not to generate the winning when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state.

Features M6. An external setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S3105, S3404 and S3406 in the main side MPU 72) for setting an external output indicating the advantageous gaming state is provided,
If the winning notification means is in the winning state of the winning maintenance combination, the winning state notification is started before the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state is made. The gaming machine described in the feature M5.

According to the feature M6, it is possible to notify the player before the outside of the gaming machine is notified that the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state.

Features M7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display parts (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the patterns;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portion and operated to stop the variable display of the picture on the corresponding variable display portion;
Variable display of the picture is started in the plurality of variable display sections based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display section corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) so that the variable display of the pattern in FIG.
Equipped with
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
The winning-correspondence granting means, when a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, grants the winning-correspondence benefit as a winning occurrence,
In the case where the winning maintenance winning combination is won in the winning lottery process, the winning notification means finally wins the winning until it becomes possible to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit that is the final stop target. The gaming machine according to the feature M5 or M6, characterized in that the state notification is started.

According to the feature M7, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the winning maintenance officer has won before the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance officer occurs in the game that wins the winning maintenance officer. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role.

Features M8. When the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning lottery process, the winning notification means starts the winning status notification before the variable display of the symbols can be stopped in the game. The gaming machine described in the feature M7, which is characterized by:

According to the feature M8, it is possible for the player to recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the variable display of the symbols in the game is started, and to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role. It becomes possible.

Features M9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The winning combination lottery executing means executes the winning combination lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, when the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed, the winning-correspondence granting means grants the winning-correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M8.

With the gaming machine having the feature M9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature M10. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to feature M9, wherein the advantageous game state is a game state in which the predetermined order is notified when the winning combination is achieved.

With the gaming machine having the feature M10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features M1 to M10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Features N1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying the pattern,
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of the pattern;
A combination lottery execution means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the start operation device is operated,
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, as one game. Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the variable display of the design is stopped and the stop design corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed, the winning-correspondence granting means (the winning determination process in the main side MPU 72) for granting the winning-correspondence privilege as occurrence of winning. Function to execute)
First transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting to the first game state (the state during CB) when the first transition condition is satisfied,
When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second transition means (the step S802 to step S803, the step S809 to step S810 and the step S903 to step S904 in the main side MPU 72) for transitioning to the second game state (bonus AT state) is performed. Function to execute)
When a predetermined number of continuous games are executed in the second game state, a game corresponding ending means for ending one execution of the second game state (the processing of steps S1007 to S1012 in the main MPU 72 is executed). Function),
In the game in which the transition condition to the second game state is satisfied, or in the second game state, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the priority means for giving priority to the game content in the first game state ( A function of executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72),
A game number management unit that treats the game amount executed under the situation where the game content in the first game state is prioritized by the priority unit (the process of step S1005 in the main MPU 72 is performed by the predetermined number of continuous games). Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature N1, when the first transition condition is satisfied in the game in which the transition condition to the second game state is satisfied or in the second game state, the game content in the first game state is prioritized. In this case, the progress of the game in the second game state is not completely stopped, but the number of games executed under the situation where the game content in the first game state is prioritized is equal to the predetermined number of continuous games in the second game state. Treated as digested. As a result, the player may prevent the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state, or expect that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state, for example. In the second game state, it is possible to intentionally shift to the first game state, or in the second game state, for example, it is expected that the purpose is to shift to the first game state. From the above, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

In addition, you may apply the structure "the said 1st game state is a game state which continues over several games."

Features N2. After the completion of the transition to the second game state after the completion condition of the first game state is satisfied under the situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority unit, the second transition unit A transition means (a function of executing an affirmative determination in steps S1103 and S1104 in the sub-side MPU 82 to execute the process of step S1106),
In the second game state, which has been transferred by the transfer control of the transfer means after the end, the game corresponding ending means is used when the remaining number of games of the predetermined continuous game number when the transfer control is generated is exhausted. The gaming machine described in the feature N1, characterized in that the execution is ended.

According to the feature N2, in the game in which the transition condition to the second game state is satisfied or in the second game state, when the game state is shifted to the first game state, the second game state is set after the end of the first game state. Even so, the second gaming state ends when the remaining predetermined number of continuing games after the number of games executed in the first gaming state is subtracted. As a result, it is possible to correlate the first game state and the second game state with each other as compared with the configuration in which the transition of the second game state is simply invalidated, and it is possible to provide a novel game content. Become.

Features N3. The post-completion transition means sets the winning state of the winning maintenance role after the completion condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the game content of the first gaming state is prioritized by the priority means. The game machine according to the feature N2, characterized in that the game machine shifts to the second game state when it becomes.

According to the feature N3, the second game state is not started immediately after the end of the first game state, but the second game state is not started unless the winning maintaining winning combination is reached. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second game state pays attention to whether or not to win the winning maintenance role after the end of the first game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Features N4. The number-of-games management means determines the winning state of the winning maintenance role after the condition for ending the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the game content in the first gaming state is prioritized by the priority means. The game machine described in the feature N3 is characterized in that the game amount executed up to that time is treated as an exhaustion amount of the predetermined continuous game number.

According to the characteristic N4, the amount of games required until the winning state of the winning maintenance combination is reached after the end of the first gaming state is treated as the consumed amount of the predetermined number of continuous games in the second gaming state. As a result, a player who expects a transition to the second gaming state expects to win the winning maintenance role by the end of the first gaming state until the completion of the game for a predetermined number of consecutive games. As the game is played, the interest of the game can be improved.

Features N5. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein the second gaming state has a higher player's advantage than the first gaming state.

According to the characteristic N5, the player may prevent the transition to the first gaming state from occurring in the second gaming state, or expect that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the second game state is improved. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Features N6. The gaming machine according to Feature N5, wherein the first game state is a game state in which the number of game media of the player at the end does not become larger than the number of game media of the player at the start.

According to the feature N6, the profit of the player greatly differs depending on whether or not the transition to the first game state occurs in the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the second game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Features N7. The gaming machine according to Feature N6, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of gaming media of the player at the end is the same as the number of gaming media of the player at the start.

According to the characteristic N7, in the first game state, the increase of the game medium cannot be expected, but the decrease does not occur. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the transition to the first gaming state occurs.

Features N8. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is an order corresponding winning combination (first bell winning combination and second bell winning combination) that allows a winning to occur when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

According to the feature N8, the predetermined order is notified in the second game state, which is a game state advantageous for the player.

Features N9. As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance winning combination (CB winning combination) in which the winning state is maintained until the corresponding winning is generated.
The first transition condition is that a win corresponding to the winning maintenance role occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, wherein the second transition condition is satisfied with at least one condition that the winning maintenance combination is in a winning state.

According to the feature N9, it is possible to cause the transition to the second game state by maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance role, and it is the second gaming state when the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated. Also, the number of games played in the first game state is subtracted from the predetermined number of continuous games while shifting to the first game state. As a result, it is possible to make a great difference in the mode of the subsequent game depending on whether or not to generate a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role, and it is possible to increase the attention of the winning maintenance role to the game in the winning state. Become.

The operation of the stop operation means can be performed by applying the configuration that "even if the winning maintenance role is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means". Depending on the mode, it is possible to generate and avoid the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance winning combination, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature N10. The second game state has a higher player's advantage than the first game state,
It is provided with a winning notification means (a function for executing the processing of step S707 in the internal status notification unit 63 and the main MPU 72) for executing the winning status notification that the winning maintenance officer is in the winning status. The gaming machine described in Characteristic N9.

According to the feature N10, it is possible to urge the player not to generate the winning when the winning maintenance combination is in the winning state.

Feature N11. It is provided with an external setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3118, step S3408 and step S3703 in the main MPU 72) for performing an external output setting that indicates the second gaming state,
The winning notification means starts the winning status notification before the external output setting indicating the second gaming status is made when the winning maintaining combination is in the winning status. The gaming machine described in the characteristic N10.

According to the characteristic N11, it is possible to notify the player of the winning state of the winning maintenance role before notifying the outside of the gaming machine.

Features N12. The pattern display means is provided with a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the design,
The variable display control means starts variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display sections based on an operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on an operation of the stop operation means. In order to stop the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to, the pattern display means is controlled,
When the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning lottery process, the winning notification means starts the winning status notification before the variable display of the symbols on all the variable display portions is stopped. The gaming machine described in the feature N10 or N11.

According to the feature N12, it is possible to let the player recognize that the winning maintainer has been won before the winning corresponding to the winning maintainer occurs in the game that is won. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role.

Features N13. The winning notification means starts the winning status notification before the variable display of the pattern is started in the game when the winning maintenance winning combination is won in the winning lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature N12.

According to the feature N13, it is possible for the player to recognize that the winning maintenance role has been won before the variable display of the symbols in the game is started, and to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, and features H1 to the configurations of the features N1 to N13. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features M1 to M10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the characteristic group M and the characteristic group N can solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Specifically, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in the state where the medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, it is necessary to provide a novel game content in the game machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating drum type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the design after the stop. A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop button, 63... Internal state notification unit, 66... Image display device, 67... Special point notification unit, 68... Stock notification unit, 69... Victory number notification unit, 70... Main control unit, 72... Main side MPU, 73... Main side ROM, 74... Main side RAM, 80... Sub control unit, 82... Sub side MPU, 83 ... Sub-side ROM, 84... Sub-side RAM.

Claims (2)

Role lottery execution means for executing the role lottery process,
A winning-correspondence granting unit that grants a winning-correspondence privilege corresponding to a winning combination in the winning combination lottery process,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state in which the degree of advantage of the player is higher than the predetermined game state, with at least one condition that the predetermined role is won in the combination lottery process in the state before transition,
In the pre-transition state, at least one condition that a different winning combination has been won in the combination lottery process, means for increasing the expectation level regarding the advantageous game state in the pre-transition state,
Equipped with
The different combination does not serve as a grant trigger in the advantageous game state in the pre-transition state, but becomes a grant trigger in the other game states,
At least in the pre-transition state, the probability of being the predetermined winning combination is higher than the probability of being the different winning combination ,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined combination serves as a grant trigger in the advantageous game state in the pre-transition state, but does not serve as a grant trigger in the other game states . The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game is played using a game medium.

Images